protect protection terminal rel 561*2 · installation and commissioning manual protectit line...

290
Installation and commissioning manual Protect IT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Upload: others

Post on 29-Sep-2020

21 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Installation and commissioning manualProtectIT Line differential and distance

protection terminalREL 561*2.5

Page 2: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

© Copyright 2006 ABB. All rights reserved.

Installation and commissioning manual Line differential and distance protection terminal

REL 561*2.5

About this manualDocument No: 1MRK 506 183-UEN

Issued: December 2006Revision: B

Page 3: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

COPYRIGHT

WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.

THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW.

THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARAN-TEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTERESTS OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STAN-DARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.

Manufacturer:

ABB Power Technologies ABSubstation Automation ProductsSE-721 59 VästeråsSwedenTelephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18www.abb.com/substationautomation

Page 4: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

PageChapter

Chapter 1 Introduction ..................................................................... 1

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual ................. 2About the complete set of manuals for a terminal .......................... 2About the installation and commissioning manual.......................... 2Intended audience .......................................................................... 3

General...................................................................................... 3Requirements ............................................................................ 3

Related documents......................................................................... 4Revision notes ................................................................................ 4Acronyms and abbreviations .......................................................... 4

Chapter 2 Safety information......................................................... 13

Warning signs .................................................................................... 14Caution signs ..................................................................................... 16Note signs.......................................................................................... 17

Chapter 3 Overview ........................................................................ 19

Commissioning and installation overview .......................................... 20

Chapter 4 Unpacking and checking the terminal ........................ 21

Receiving, unpacking and checking .................................................. 22

Chapter 5 Installing the terminal ................................................... 23

Overview............................................................................................ 24Mounting the terminal ........................................................................ 25

Mounting in a 19-inch rack ........................................................... 26Mounting in a 19-inch rack with an additional box type RHGS..... 27Mounting in a flush or semi-flush installation ................................ 28Mounting on a wall ....................................................................... 30

Mounting the terminal on a wall............................................... 31Preparing a wall mounted terminal for electrical installation.... 32

Making the electrical connections...................................................... 33Connecting the CT circuits............................................................ 33Connecting the auxiliary power, VT and signal connectors .......... 33Connecting to protective earth...................................................... 35Making the screen connection...................................................... 35

Installing the optical fibres ................................................................. 36

Page 5: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC.......... 37RS485 serial communication module ........................................... 37Informative excerpt from EIA Standard RS-485 ........................... 39Data on RS485 serial communication module cable .................... 41

Installing the 56/64 kbit data communication cables.......................... 42

Chapter 6 Checking the external circuitry .................................... 45

Overview............................................................................................ 46Checking the CT and VT circuits ....................................................... 47Checking the power supply................................................................ 48Checking the binary I/O circuits ......................................................... 49

Binary input circuits....................................................................... 49Binary output circuits .................................................................... 49

Chapter 7 Energising the terminal................................................. 51

Overview............................................................................................ 52Energising the terminal ...................................................................... 53Checking the self supervision signals ................................................ 55

Reconfiguring the terminal............................................................ 55Setting the terminal time ............................................................... 55Checking the self supervision function ......................................... 55

Navigating the menus.............................................................. 55Self supervision HMI data............................................................. 56

Chapter 8 Configuring the 56/64 kbit data communication modules .............................................. 57

Configuring the fibre optical modem .................................................. 58Calculation of optical power budget ................................................... 59Configuring the short range fibre optical modem............................... 60Configuring the short range galvanic modem .................................... 64Configure the interface modules for V.36, X.21 and RS530.............. 66Configuring the interface modules for G.703 co-directional............... 68Fault tracing ....................................................................................... 69

Comfail function....................................................................... 69Explanation of contents in column 2 of table 42 ...................... 70

Configuring the transceiver 21-15xx .................................................. 73Co-directional operation..................................................................... 74Contra-directional operation............................................................... 76Configuring the transceiver 21-16xx .................................................. 78

X.21 operation .............................................................................. 78G.703 co-directional operation...................................................... 79

Chapter 9 Setting and configuring the terminal........................... 81

Page 6: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Overview............................................................................................ 82Entering settings through the local HMI............................................. 83Configuring the setting restriction of HMI function ............................. 84Activating the restriction of setting ..................................................... 85

Local HMI ..................................................................................... 85Serial communication, change of active group............................. 85Serial communication, setting....................................................... 85

Downloading settings and configuration from a PC........................... 86Establishing front port communication.......................................... 86Establishing rear port communication........................................... 86

Using the SPA/IEC rear port.................................................... 86Using LON rear port ................................................................ 87

Downloading the configuration and setting files ........................... 87

Chapter 10 Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report89

Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report.......................... 90

Chapter 11 Establishing connection and verifying the SPA/IEC-communication .............................................. 91

Entering settings ................................................................................ 92Entering SPA settings................................................................... 92Entering IEC settings.................................................................... 92

Verifying the communication.............................................................. 94Verifying SPA communication ...................................................... 94Verifying IEC communication........................................................ 94

Optical budget calculation for serial communication with SPA/IEC . 95

Chapter 12 Establishing connection and verifying the LON com-munication ..................................................................... 97

Reference .......................................................................................... 98Verification of the optical budget .................................................. 98

Optical budget calculation for serial communication with LON 98

Chapter 13 Verifying settings by secondary injection ................. 99

Overview.......................................................................................... 100Preparing for test ............................................................................. 102

Overview..................................................................................... 102Preparing the connection to the test equipment ......................... 102Setting the terminal in test mode ................................................ 103Connecting test equipment to the terminal ................................. 103Verifying the connection and the analog inputs.......................... 104

Page 7: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Releasing the function(s) to be tested ........................................ 105Checking the disturbance report settings ................................... 105Identifying the function to test in the technical reference manual ........................................... 106

Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)......................................... 107External activation of SOTF function .......................................... 107Automatic initiation of SOTF ....................................................... 107Completing the test..................................................................... 107

Autorecloser (AR) ............................................................................ 108Preparing .................................................................................... 109Checking the AR functionality..................................................... 110Checking the reclosing condition ................................................ 110

Checking the Inhibit signal..................................................... 111Checking the closing onto a fault........................................... 111Checking the breaker not ready ............................................ 111Checking the synchro-check condition (for three-phase reclosing cycle) ............................ 111Checking the operation Stand-by and Off ............................. 111

Testing the multi-breaker arrangement....................................... 112Completing the test..................................................................... 112

Breaker failure protection (BFP) ...................................................... 113Verifying the settings .................................................................. 113Verifying the retrip setting ........................................................... 113

Checking the retrip function with retrip set to off.................... 113Checking the retrip function with current check..................... 113Checking the retrip function without current check ................ 114

Completing the test..................................................................... 114Broken conductor check (BRC) ....................................................... 115

Measuring the operate and time limit of set values .................... 115Communication channel test logic (CCHT)...................................... 116

Testing the logic.......................................................................... 116Current circuit supervision (CTSU) .................................................. 117Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL) ...................... 118

Current reversal logic.................................................................. 118Checking of current reversal ................................................. 118

Weak end infeed logic ................................................................ 119WEI logic at permissive schemes.......................................... 119Testing conditions.................................................................. 119

Completing the test..................................................................... 120Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) ....................................................... 121

Testing the current reversal logic................................................ 121Testing the weak-end-infeed logic .............................................. 121

If setting parameter WEI=Echo.............................................. 121If setting WEI=Trip ................................................................. 122

Completing the test..................................................................... 123Dead line detection (DLD)................................................................ 124Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)........................ 125

Checking the operate values of the current measuring elements ............................................... 125

Distance protection (ZMn)................................................................ 128Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 131Measuring the operate time of distance protection zones .......... 132

Page 8: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Completing the test..................................................................... 132Disturbance recorder (DR)............................................................... 133Event counter (CN) .......................................................................... 134Event function (EV).......................................................................... 135Event recorder (ER)......................................................................... 136Fault locator (FLOC) ........................................................................ 137

Measuring the operate limit ........................................................ 137Completing the test..................................................................... 138

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4) ........................................................... 139

Testing the direction measuring element.................................... 139Testing the current step 4. .......................................................... 139

Testing the setting “NonDirNonRestr” or “Restrained” .......... 140Testing the setting “ForwRelease” or “ForwRelRestr” ........... 140Testing the setting “RevBlock” or “RevBlRestr” ..................... 141Testing the characteristic setting 1=NI, 2=VI, 3=EI or 4=LOG ......................................... 141Testing the characteristic setting 0=DEF............................... 142

Testing the “Blocking at parallel transformer” function. .............. 142Testing the current step 1-3........................................................ 143

Testing the setting “NonDirNonRestr” or “Restrained” .......... 143Testing the setting “ForwRelease” or “ForwRelRestr” ........... 143Testing the setting “RevBlock” or “RevBlRestr” ..................... 144Testing the time setting “t1” ................................................... 144

Testing the Switch-onto-fault ..................................................... 145Testing the switch-onto-fault with setting 1 = IN2> and 2 = IN4>Res ......................................................................... 145Testing the switch-onto-fault with setting 2 = IN4>Res ......... 145

Completing the test..................................................................... 146Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)...................................................... 147

Checking that the binary inputs and outputs operate as expected ............................................................ 147Measuring the operate value for the negative sequence function ................................................ 148Measuring the operate value for the zero sequence function..... 148Checking the operation of the du/dt, di/dt based function .......... 149Completing the test..................................................................... 150

High speed binary output logic (HSBO)........................................... 151HSBO- trip from communication logic......................................... 151ZCOM trip schemes.................................................................... 152HSBO- trip from the distance protection zone 1 function (ZM1) . 152Completing the test..................................................................... 153

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)............ 154Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 154

Phase overcurrent protection ................................................ 154Residual overcurrent protection (non-dir.) ............................. 154

Completing the test..................................................................... 154Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)...................... 155

Testing the line differential protection ......................................... 157Testing the charging current compensation................................ 159Completing the test..................................................................... 160

Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)....................................................... 161Loss of voltage check (LOV)............................................................ 162

Page 9: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 162Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)........................................... 164

Verifying the settings .................................................................. 164Completing the test..................................................................... 164

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) ........................................... 165Verifying the settings .................................................................. 165Completing the test..................................................................... 166

Multiple command (CM)................................................................... 167Overload supervision (OVLD) .......................................................... 168

Measuring the operate and time limit of set values .................... 168Phase selection logic (PHS) ............................................................ 170

Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 172Pole discordance protection (PD) .................................................... 173Pole slip protection (PSP)................................................................ 174

Measuring the operating characteristics ..................................... 174Applying additional settings ................................................... 174Measuring the impedance boundaries................................... 174

Testing the pole slip functionality................................................ 180Testing the additional functionality.............................................. 181Completing the test..................................................................... 181

Power swing detection (PSD) .......................................................... 182Testing overview......................................................................... 183Testing the one-of-three-phase operation .................................. 183Testing the two-of-three-phase operation................................... 183Testing the tEF timer and functionality ....................................... 184Testing the tR1 timer .................................................................. 185Testing the tR2 timer .................................................................. 185Testing the block input................................................................ 186Completing the test..................................................................... 186

Power swing additional logic (PSL).................................................. 187Testing the carrier send and trip signals..................................... 187Testing the influence of the residual overcurrent protection ....... 188Controlling of the underreaching zone........................................ 188Completing the test..................................................................... 189

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC).............................................. 190Radial feeder protection (PAP) ........................................................ 191

Testing the fast fault clearance................................................... 191Testing the delayed fault clearance ............................................ 191Completing the test..................................................................... 192

Setting lockout (HMI) ....................................................................... 193Verifying the settings .................................................................. 193Completing the test..................................................................... 193

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) .......................................... 194Testing permissive underreach................................................... 194Testing permissive overreach..................................................... 194Testing blocking scheme ............................................................ 195Checking of unblocking logic ...................................................... 195

Command function with continuous unblocking (Unblock = 1) ................................................................ 195

Completing the test..................................................................... 196Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC) ......................................................... 197

Testing the directional comparison logic function ....................... 197

Page 10: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Blocking scheme ................................................................... 197Permissive scheme ............................................................... 198

Completing the test..................................................................... 198Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1).......... 199

Measuring the operate and time limit for set values ................... 199Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2) .................. 201

Measuring the operate and time limit of set values .................... 201Four parameter setting groups (GRP) ............................................. 203

Verifying the settings .................................................................. 203Single command (CD) ..................................................................... 204Stub protection (STUB).................................................................... 205

Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 205Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) .................................... 207

Testing the phasing function....................................................... 209Testing the frequency difference ........................................... 210

Testing the synchrocheck........................................................... 210............................................................................................... 210Testing the voltage difference ............................................... 211Testing the phase difference ................................................ 212Testing the frequency difference ........................................... 215Testing the reference voltage ................................................ 215

Testing the energizing check...................................................... 216............................................................................................... 216Testing the dead line live bus (DLLB).................................... 216Testing the dead bus live line (DBLL).................................... 217Testing both directions (DLLB or DBLL)................................ 218Testing the dead bus dead line (DBDL) ................................ 218

Testing the voltage selection ...................................................... 219Testing the voltage selection for single CB arrangements .... 219Testing the voltage selection for 1 1/2 circuit breaker diameter .......................................................... 220

Completing the test..................................................................... 221Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) .................................... 222

Measuring the operate and time limit of set values .................... 222Testing the protection without external temperature compensation (NonComp) ................................ 222

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC) ............ 224Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 224

Time delayed phase overcurrent ........................................... 224Time delayed residual overcurrent (non-dir.)......................... 224

Completing the test..................................................................... 225Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) .................................... 226

Verifying the settings .................................................................. 226Time delayed phase overvoltage protection.......................... 226Time delayed residual overvoltage protection (non-dir.) ....... 226

Completing the test..................................................................... 226Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) .................................. 227

Verifying the settings .................................................................. 227Completing the test..................................................................... 227

Tripping logic (TR) ........................................................................... 2283ph operating mode.................................................................... 2281ph/3ph operating mode............................................................. 2281ph/2ph/3ph operating mode...................................................... 229

Page 11: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Completing the test..................................................................... 230Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3) ........................................................ 231

Measuring the operate and time limit for set values ................... 231Measuring the operate limit of the low step overcurrent protection ................................................. 231Measuring the definite time delay of the low set stage.......... 231Measuring the inverse time delay of the low set stage.......... 231Measuring the operate limit of the high step overcurrent protection ............................................................................ 232Measuring the operate limit of the directional lines................ 232

Completing the test..................................................................... 233Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)......................................................... 234

Measuring the operate and time limit for set values ................... 234Measuring the operate limit of the low step overcurrent protection ............................................................................ 234Measuring the definite time delay of the low set stage.......... 234Measuring the inverse time delay of the low set stage.......... 234Measuring the operate limit of the high step overcurrent protection ............................................................................ 235

Completing the test..................................................................... 235Low active power protection (LAPP)................................................ 236

Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 236Low active power in any phase ............................................. 236Dependability test .................................................................. 236Security test with respect to directionality.............................. 237Time delay test ...................................................................... 237Completing the test................................................................ 237

Low active and reactiv power protection (LARP) ............................. 238Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 238

Low active and reactive power in any phase......................... 238Dependability test .................................................................. 238Security test with respect to directionality.............................. 239Time delay test ...................................................................... 239

High active power protection (HAPP) .............................................. 240Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 240

High active power in any phase............................................. 240Dependability test .................................................................. 240Security test with respect to directionality.............................. 241Time delay test ...................................................................... 241

High active and reactive power protection (HARP).......................... 242Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 242

High active and reactive power in any phase ........................ 242Dependability test .................................................................. 242Security test with respect to directionality.............................. 243Time delay test ...................................................................... 243

Sudden change in phase current protection (SCC1) ...................... 244Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 244

Sudden change in current in any phase ................................ 244Dependability test .................................................................. 244Time delay test ...................................................................... 244Completing the test................................................................ 245

Page 12: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Sudden change in residual current protection (SCRC) ................... 246Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 246

Sudden change in residual current........................................ 246Dependability test .................................................................. 246Time delay test ...................................................................... 246Completing the test................................................................ 247

Sudden change in voltage protection (SCV) ................................... 248Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 248

Sudden change in voltage in any phase................................ 248Dependability test .................................................................. 248Time delay test ...................................................................... 248Completing the test................................................................ 249

Overvoltage protection (OVP).......................................................... 250Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 250

Overvoltage in any phase...................................................... 250Dependability test .................................................................. 250Time delay test ...................................................................... 250Completing the test................................................................ 250

Undercurrent protection (UCP) ........................................................ 251Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 251

Undercurrent in any phase .................................................... 251Dependbility test .................................................................... 251Time delay test ...................................................................... 251Completing the test................................................................ 251

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) ............................................... 252Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 252

Overcurrent in any phase ...................................................... 252Dependability test .................................................................. 252Time delay test ...................................................................... 252Completing the test................................................................ 252

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) ......................................... 253Measuring the operate limit of set values ................................... 253

Residual overcurrent ............................................................. 253Dependability test .................................................................. 253Time delay test ...................................................................... 253Completing the test................................................................ 254

Chapter 14 Verifying the internal configuration .......................... 255

Overview.......................................................................................... 256Testing the interaction of the distance protection ............................ 257

Chapter 15 Testing the protection system ................................... 259

Overview.......................................................................................... 260Testing the interaction of the distance protection ............................ 261

Chapter 16 Checking the directionality ........................................ 263

Page 13: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

Contents

Overview.......................................................................................... 264Testing the directionality of the distance protection ......................... 265Testing the directional residual overcurrent protection .................... 267

Chapter 17 Fault tracing and repair............................................... 269

Fault tracing ..................................................................................... 270Using information on the local HMI............................................. 270Using front-connected PC or SMS.............................................. 271

Repair instruction............................................................................. 273Repair support ................................................................................. 275

Page 14: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

1

About this chapter Chapter 1Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

About this chapterThis chapter introduces the user to the manual.

Page 15: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

2

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

1 Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

1.1 About the complete set of manuals for a terminalThe users manual (UM) is a complete set of four different manuals:

The Application Manual (AM) contains descriptions, such as application and functionality de-scriptions as well as setting calculation examples sorted per function. The application manual should be used when designing and engineering the protection terminal to find out when and for what a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calcu-lating settings and creating configurations.

The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains technical descriptions, such as function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameter tables and technical data sort-ed per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during the normal service phase.

The Operator's Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection terminal during normal service (after commissioning and before periodic maintenance tests). The opera-tor's manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.

The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection terminal. The manual can also be used as a reference if a periodic test is performed. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, en-ergizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying set-tings and performing a directional test. The chapters and sections are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection terminal should be installed and commissioned.

1.2 About the installation and commissioning manualThe installation and commissioning manual contains the following chapters:

• The chapter “Safety information” presents warning and note signs, which the user should pay attention to.

Applicationmanual

Technicalreference

manual

Installation andcommissioning

manual

Operator´smanual

en01000044.vsd

Page 16: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

3

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

• The chapter “Overview” gives an overview over the major tasks when installing and commissioning the terminal.

• The chapter “Unpacking and checking the terminal” contains instructions on how to receive the terminal.

• The chapter “Installing the terminal” contains instructions on how to install the terminal.

• The chapter “Checking the external circuitry” contains instructions on how to check that the terminal is properly connected to the protection system.

• The chapter “Energising the terminal” contains instructions on how to start-up the terminal.

• The chapter “Setting and configuring the terminal” contains instructions on how to download settings and configuration to the terminal.

• The chapter “Establishing connection and verifying the SPA/IEC-communica-tion” contains instructions on how to enter SPA/IEC settings and verifying the SPA/IEC communication.

• The chapter “Establishing connection and verifying the LON communication” contains a reference to another document.

• The chapter “Verifying settings by secondary injection” contains instructions on how to verify that each included function operates correctly according to the set values.

• The chapter “Primary injection testing” describes a test with primary current through the protected zone.

• The chapter “Testing the protection system” contains instructions on how to test that the terminal is in contact with the primary system.

• The chapter “Fault tracing and repair” contains instructions on how to fault trace.

1.3 Intended audience

1.3.1 GeneralThe installation and commissioning manual is addressing the installation, commissioning and maintenance personnel responsible for taking the protection into normal service and out of ser-vice.

1.3.2 RequirementsThe installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling elec-tronic equipment. The commissioning and maintenance personnel must be well experienced in using protection equipment, test equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protection.

Page 17: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

4

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

1.4 Related documents

1.5 Revision notes

1.6 Acronyms and abbreviations

Documents related to REL 561*2.5 Identity number

Operator's manual 1MRK 506 181-UEN

Installation and commissioning manual 1MRK 506 183-UEN

Technical reference manual 1MRK 506 182-UEN

Application manual 1MRK 506 184-UEN

Buyer's guide 1MRK 506 180-BEN

Revision Description

B Minor updates in chapter:

• Configuring the 56/64 kbit data communication modules / Configuring the fibre optical modem

• Verifying settings by secondary injection / Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

AC Alternating Current

ACrv2 Setting A for programmable overvoltage IDMT curve, step 2

A/D converter Analog to Digital converter

ADBS Amplitude dead-band supervision

AIM Analog input module

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer

ASD Adaptive Signal Detection

AWG American Wire Gauge standard

BIM Binary input module

BLKDEL Block of delayed fault clearing

BOM Binary output module

BR Binary transfer receive over LDCM

BS British Standard

BSR Binary Signal Receive (SMT) over LDCM

BST Binary Signal Transmit (SMT) over LDCM

BT Binary Transfer Transmit over LDCM

Page 18: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

5

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

C34.97

CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communi-cation

CAP 531 Configuration and programming tool

CB Circuit breaker

CBM Combined backplane module

CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Tele-communications Union.

CCS Current circuit supervision

CEM Controller area network emulation module

CIM Communication interface module

CMPPS Combined Mega Pulses Per Second

CO cycle Close-Open cycle

Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions

Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals

CPU Central Processor Unit

CR Carrier Receive

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRL POR carrier for WEI logic

CS Carrier send

CT Current transformer

CT1L1 Input to be used for transmit CT group 1line L1 in signal matrix tool

CT1L1NAM Signal name for CT-group 1line L1 in signal matrix tool

CT2L3 Input to be used for transmission of CT-group 2 line L3 to remote end

CT2N Input to be used for transmission of CT-group 2 neutral N to remote end.

CVT Capacitive voltage transformer

DAR Delayed auto-reclosing

db dead band

DBDL Dead bus dead line

DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct Current

DIN-rail Rail conforming to DIN standard

DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board

Page 19: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

6

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

DLLB Dead line live bus

DSP Digital signal processor

DTT Direct transfer trip scheme

EHV network Extra high voltage network

EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC Electro magnetic compatibility

ENGV1 Enable execution of step one

ENMULT Current multiplier used when THOL is used for two or more lines

EMI Electro magnetic interference

ESD Electrostatic discharge

FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals

FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer

FOX 6Plus Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

FRRATED Rated system frequency

FSMPL Physical channel number for frequency calculation

G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local tele-phone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines

G.711 Standard for pulse code modulation of analog signals on digital lines

GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module

GI General interrogation command

GIS Gas insulated switchgear.

GOOSE Generic Object Orientated Substation Event

GPS Global positioning system

GR GOOSE Receive (interlock)

HDLC protocol High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard

HFBR connector type Fibre connector receiver

HMI Human-Machine Interface

HSAR High-Speed Auto-Reclosing

HV High voltage

HVDC High voltage direct current

HysAbsFreq Absolute hysteresis for over and under frequency operation

HysAbsMagn Absolute hysteresis for signal magnitude in percentage of Ubase

HysRelMagn Relative hysteresis for signal magnitude

Page 20: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

7

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

HystAbs Overexcitation level of absolute hysteresis as a percentage

HystRel Overexcitation level of relative hysteresis as a percentage

IBIAS Magnitude of the bias current common to L1, L2 and L3

IDBS Integrating dead-band supervision

IDMT Minimum inverse delay time

IDMTtmin Inverse delay minimum time in seconds

IdMin Operational restrictive characteristic, section 1 sensitivity, multiple Ibase

IDNSMAG Magnitude of negative sequence differential current

Idunre Unrestrained prot. limit multiple of winding1 rated current

ICHARGE Amount of compensated charging current

IEC International Electrical Committee

IEC 186A

IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for pro-tective current transformers for transient performance

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) stan-dard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical

EMF Electro magnetic force

IED Intelligent electronic device

I-GIS Intelligent gas insulated switchgear

IL1RE Real current component, phase L1

IL1IM Imaginary current component, phase L1

IminNegSeq Negative sequence current must be higher than this to be used

INAMPL Present magnitude of residual current

INSTMAGN Magnitude of instantaneous value

INSTNAME Instance name in signal matrix tool

IOM Binary Input/Output module

IPOSIM Imaginary part of positive sequence current

IPOSRE Real component of positve sequence current

IP 20 Enclosure protects against solid foreign objects 12.5mm in diameter and larger but no protection against ingression of liquid according to IEC60529. Equivalent to NEMA type 1.

Page 21: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

8

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

IP 40 Enclosure protects against solid foreign objects 1.0mm in diameter or larger but no protection against ingression of liquid according to IEC60529.

IP 54 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) according to IEC 60529. Dust protected. Protected against splashing water. Equiva-lent to NEMA type 12.

Ip>block Block of the function at high phase current in percentage of base

IRVBLK Block of current reversal function

IRV Activation of current reversal logic

ITU International Telecommunications Union

k2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode

kForIEEE Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve

LAN Local area network

LIB 520

LCD Liquid chrystal display

LDCM Line differential communication module

LDD Local detection device

LED Light emitting diode

LNT LON network tool

LON Local operating network

MAGN Magnitude of deadband value

MCB Miniature circuit breaker

MCM Mezzanine carrier module

MIM Milliampere Input Module

MIP

MPPS

MPM Main processing module

MV Medium voltage

MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains

MVsubEna Enable substitution

NegSeqROA Operate angle for internal/external negative sequence fault discrimina-tor.

NSANGLE Angle between local and remote negative sequence currents

NUMSTEP Number of steps that shall be activated

NX

OCO cycle Open-Close-Open cycle

PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect

Page 22: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

9

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

PCM Pulse code modulation

PISA Process interface for sensors & actuators

PLD Programmable Logic Device

PMC

POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip

PPS Precise Positioning System

Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components

PSM Power supply module

PST Parameter setting tool

PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip

R1A Source resistance A (near end)

R1B Source resistance B (far end)

RADSS Resource Allocation Decision Support System

RASC Synchrocheck relay, from COMBIFLEX range.

RCA Functionality characteristic angle

REVAL Evaluation software

RFPP Resistance of phase-to-phase faults

RFPE Resistance of phase-to-earth faults

RISC Reduced instruction set computer

RMS value Root mean square value

RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections

RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RS530 A generic connector specification that can be used to support RS422, V.35 and X.21 and others

RTU Remote Terminal Unit

RTC Real Time Clock

SA Substation Automation

SC Switch or push-button to close

SCS Station control system

SLM Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication

SMA connector Sub Miniature version A connector

SMS Station monitoring system

SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication

Page 23: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

10

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

SPGGIO Single Point Gxxxxx Generic Input/Output

SRY Switch for CB ready condition

ST3UO RMS voltage at neutral point

STL1 Start signal from phase L1

ST Switch or push-button to trip

SVC Static VAr compensation

t1 1Ph Open time for shot 1, single phase

t1 3PhHS Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing three phase

tAutoContWait Wait period after close command before next shot

tCBCLosedMin Minimum time that the circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is permitted

tExtended t1 Open time extended by this value if Extended t1 is true

THL Thermal Overload Line cable

THOL Thermal overload

tInhibit Reset reclosing time for inhibit

tPulse Pulse length for single command outputs

TP Logic Pulse Timer

tReporting Cycle time for reporting of counter value

tRestore Restore time delay

TCS Trip circuit supervision

TNC connector Type of bayonet connector, like BNC connector

TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC

tReclaim Duration of the reclaim time

TRIPENHA Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection

TRIPRES Trip by restrained differential protection

TRL1 Trip signal from phase 1

truck Isolator with wheeled mechanism

tSync Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK

TTRIP Estimated time to trip (in minutes)

UBase Base setting for phase-phase voltage in kilovolts

U/I-PISA Process interface components that delivers measured voltage and cur-rent values

UNom Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer

UPS Measured signal magnitude (voltage protection)

UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals

Page 24: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

11

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

V.36 Same as RS449. A generic connector specification that can be used to support RS422 and others

VDC Volts Direct Current

WEI Week-end infeed logic

VT Voltage transformer

VTSZ Block of trip from weak-end infeed logic by an open breaker

X1A Source reactance A (near end)

X1B Source reactance B (far end)

X1L Positive sequence line reactance

X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment

XLeak Winding reactance in primary ohms

XOL Zero sequence line reactance

ZCOM-CACC Forward overreaching zone used in the communication scheme

ZCOM-CR Carrier Receive Signal

ZCOM-TRIP Trip from the communication scheme

ZCOM-LCG Alarm Signal LIne-check Guard

Page 25: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

12

Introduction to the installation and commissioning manual

Chapter 1Introduction

Page 26: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

13

About this chapter Chapter 2Safety information

Chapter 2 Safety information

About this chapterThis chapter contains safety information. Warning signs are presented which attend the user to be careful during certain operations in order to avoid human injuries or damage to equipment

Page 27: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

14

Warning signs Chapter 2Safety information

1 Warning signs

Warning!Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations. Working in a high voltage environ-ment requires serious approach to avoid human injuries and damage to equipment.

Warning!Do not touch circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.

Warning!Always avoid to touch the circuitry when the cover is removed. The product contains electronic circuitries which can be damaged if exposed to static electricity (ESD). The electronic circuit-ries also contain high voltage which is lethal to humans.

Warning!Always use suitable isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry. Potentially le-thal voltages and currents are present.

Prohibition!Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a IED during normal opera-tion. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be lethal. Operation may be disrupt-ed and IED and measuring circuitry may be damaged.

Warning!Always connect the IED to protective earth, regardless of the operating conditions. This also applies to special occasions such as bench testing, demonstrations and off-site configuration. Operating the IED without proper earthing may damage both IED and measuring circuitry and may cause injuries in case of an accident.

Warning!Never disconnect a secondary connection of current transformer circuit without short-circuiting the transformer’s secondary winding. Operating a current transformer with the secondary winding open will cause a massive potential build-up that may damage the transformer and may cause injuries to humans.

Page 28: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

15

Warning signs Chapter 2Safety information

Warning!Never remove any screw from a powered IED or from a IED connected to powered circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.

Page 29: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

16

Caution signs Chapter 2Safety information

2 Caution signs

Caution!Always transport modules using certified conductive bags. Always handle modules using a con-ductive wrist strap connected to protective ground and on a suitable antistatic surface. Electro-static discharge (ESD) may cause damage to the module.

Caution!Do not connect live wires to the IED. Internal circuitry may be damaged

Caution!Always use a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground when replacing modules. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage the module and IED circuitry.

Caution!Take care to avoid electrical shock if accessing wiring and connection IEDs when installing and commissioning.

Caution!Changing the active setting group will inevitably change the IED’s operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the change.

Page 30: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

17

Note signs Chapter 2Safety information

3 Note signs

Note!The protection assembly is designed for a maximum continuous current of four times rated val-ue.

Note!Activating the setting lockout function, which prevents unauthorised changes of the settings, without proper configuration may seriously affect the IED’s operation.

Page 31: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

18

Note signs Chapter 2Safety information

Page 32: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

19

About this chapter Chapter 3Overview

Chapter 3 Overview

About this chapterThis chapter introduces the user to the installation and commissioning tasks.

Page 33: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

20

Commissioning and installation overview Chapter 3Overview

1 Commissioning and installation overviewThe settings for each function must be calculated before the commissioning task can start. A configuration, made in the configuration and programming tool, must also be available if the ter-minal does not have a factory configuration downloaded.

The terminal is unpacked and visually checked. It is preferably mounted in a cubicle or on a wall. The connection to the protection system has to be checked in order to verify that the installation was successful.

The installation and commissioning task starts with configuring the digital communication mod-ules, if included. The terminal can then be configured and set, which means that settings and a configuration has to be applied if the terminal does not have a factory configuration downloaded. Then the operation of each included function according to applied settings has to be verified by secondary injection. A complete check of the configuration can then be made. A conformity test of the secondary system has also to be done. When the primary system has been energised a di-rectionality check should be made.

Page 34: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

21

About this chapter Chapter 4Unpacking and checking the

terminal

Chapter 4 Unpacking and checking the terminal

About this chapterThis chapter contains instructions on how to receive the terminal.

Page 35: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

22

Receiving, unpacking and checking Chapter 4Unpacking and checking the

terminal

1 Receiving, unpacking and checkingProcedure1. Remove the transport casing.

2. Visually inspect the terminal.

3. Check that all items are included in accordance with the delivery documents.

The user is requested to check that all software functions are included ac-cording to the delivery documents after the terminal has been energised.

4. Check for transport damages.

In case of transport damage appropriate action must be taken against the latest carrier and the nearest ABB office or representative should be in-formed. ABB should be notified immediately if there are any discrepan-cies in relation to the delivery documents.

Store the terminal in the original transport casing in a dry and dust free place, if the terminal is not to be installed or commissioned immediately. Observe the environmental requirements stated in the technical data.

Page 36: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

23

About this chapter Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Chapter 5 Installing the terminal

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to install the terminal.

Page 37: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

24

Overview Chapter 5Installing the terminal

1 OverviewThe mechanical and electrical environmental conditions at the installation site must be within permissible range according to the technical data of the terminal. Dusty, damp places, places li-able to rapid temperature variations, powerful vibrations and shocks, surge voltages of high am-plitude and fast rise time, strong induced magnetic fields or similar extreme conditions should be avoided.

Sufficient space must be available in front of and at rear of the terminal to allow access for main-tenance and future modifications. Flush mounted terminals should be mounted so that terminal modules can be added and replaced without excessive demounting.

Page 38: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

25

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

2 Mounting the terminalMost of the REx 5xx terminals can be rack, flush, semi-flush or wall mounted with the use of different mounting kits. An additional box of type RHGS can be mounted to one side of a 1/2 or 3/4 terminal. The 19-inch 1/1 wide terminal cannot be semi-flush mounted because the mount-ing distance frame will cover the ventilation openings at the top and bottom.

A suitable mounting kit is available. Mounting kits include instruction sheets and all parts need-ed including screws. The following mounting kits are available:

• 19-inch rack mounting kits, 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 terminal width variants. See section 2.1 "Mounting in a 19-inch rack".

• Side-by-side mounting kit. See section 2.2 "Mounting in a 19-inch rack with an additional box type RHGS".

• Flush mounting kit. See section 2.3 "Mounting in a flush or semi-flush installa-tion".

• Semi-flush mounting kit. See section 2.3 "Mounting in a flush or semi-flush in-stallation".

• Wall mounting kit. See section 2.4 "Mounting on a wall".

Page 39: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

26

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

2.1 Mounting in a 19-inch rack

Figure 1: 19-inch rack mounting

PosNo Description

1 and 4 Mounting angle

2 and 3 TORX T20 screws

(98000037)

1

2

3

4

Page 40: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

27

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Procedure1. Carefully fasten the mounting angles to the sides of the terminal.

Use the TORX T20 screws available in the mounting kit.

2. Place the terminal assembly in the rack.

3. Fasten the mounting angles with appropriate screws.

2.2 Mounting in a 19-inch rack with an additional box type RHGSMake sure a side-by-side mounting kit and a suitable 19-inch rack mounting kit are available before proceeding.

Assemble the two terminals by using a side-by-side mounting kit. Then mount the brackets and install the assembled terminals in the rack as described in section 2.1 "Mounting in a 19-inch rack".

Figure 2: Side-by-side assembly

Procedure1. Place the two terminals next to each other on a flat surface.

PosNo Description

1 Side-by-side mounting plate

2 Screws (TORX T20)

3 Mounting angle

xx03000028.vsd

3

1

2

Page 41: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

28

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

2. Fasten a side-by-side mounting plate (PosNo 1).

Use four of the delivered screws.

3. Carefully turn the two terminals up-side down.

4. Fasten the second side-by-side mounting plate.

Use the remaining four screws.

5. Follow the instructions in section 2.1 "Mounting in a 19-inch rack" to mount the mounting angles (PosNo 5) and install the side-by-side assembly in the rack.

2.3 Mounting in a flush or semi-flush installationMake sure a flush or semi-flush mounting kit is available before proceeding.

The procedure for flush and semi-flush mounting is mainly the same. In semi-flush mounts a distance frame is added. The delivered mounting seal is only necessary to fulfil IP 54.

Page 42: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

29

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Figure 3: Flush and semi-flash mounting

PosNo Description

1 Sealing strip

2 Distance frame (only for semi-flush)

3 Sealing strip for distance frame (only for semi-flush)

4 Side holder

5 Groove

6 Locking screw (TORX T10)

xx00000129.eps

12

3

4

56

Note!Flush or semi-flush mount cannot be used for side-by-side mounted terminals when IP 54 must be fulfilled.

Page 43: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

30

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Procedure1. Cut the sealing strip in appropriate lengths.

The strip is delivered with the mounting kit. In the semi-flush mounting kit two strips are delivered, one for the terminal and one self-adhering for the distance frame. The length of the strip is enough for the largest avail-able terminal.

Cut the strip into four, one part for each side of the terminal. When cut-ting, make sure no gaps will be present between each part. Preferably, seal the joints at the corners (posNo 1).

Repeat the procedure for the self-adhering strip which are to be adhered to the distance frame.

2. Dispose the strip remains.

The remains should be source separated as soft plastic.

3. Carefully press the cut strips into the front panel groove.

4. Adhere the cut strips (posNo 3) to the edge of the distance frame (posNo 2).

semi-flush mounting only.

5. Make a panel cut-out.

See the Technical reference manual for cut-out dimensions.

6. Insert the terminal into the cut-out.

7. Add and lock the side holders (PosNo 4) to the terminal.

Thread a side holder into the groove (posNo 5) at the back end of the ter-minal. Insert and lightly fasten the locking screw (posNo 6). Next, thread a side holder on the other side of the terminal, and lightly fasten its lock-ing screw.

Repeat this with the remaining two side holders.

8. Lock the terminal to the cut-out.

Firmly tighten the locking screws. It is important that all four side holder locking screws are tightened the same in order to maintain a good and even seal in IP 54 environments.

2.4 Mounting on a wall The mounting bars are prepared for adding DIN-rails or equivalent above and below the mount-ed terminal. If used, make sure all necessary parts such as rails and terminal blocks are available before starting. Make sure the wall mounting kit is available.

Page 44: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

31

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Figure 4: Wall mounting

2.4.1 Mounting the terminal on a wall

Procedure1. Mount the bars (posNo 1) onto the wall.

See the Technical reference manual for measurements.

Depending on the wall different preparations may be needed, like drilling and inserting plastic or expander plugs (concrete/plasterboard walls) or threading (metal sheet wall).

2. Mount the DIN-rail(s) on the mounting bars.

3. Mount the terminal blocks on the DIN-rail(s).

It is much easier to do this without the unit in place.

PosNo Description

1 Mounting bar

2 Side plate

xx00000130.eps

1

2

Page 45: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

32

Mounting the terminal Chapter 5Installing the terminal

4. Make all external electrical connections to the terminal blocks.

It is much easier to do this without the unit in place.

5. Mount the side plates (posNo 2) to the terminal.

6. Mount the terminal to the mounting bars.

2.4.2 Preparing a wall mounted terminal for electrical installation

Procedure1. Remove all screws from one side plate.

2. Remove two screws from the other side plate.

3. Careful swing the terminal out from the wall.

See figure 5.

xx99000287Figure 5: View from above over a wall mounted terminal that is pre-

pared for electrical connection.

Page 46: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

33

Making the electrical connections Chapter 5Installing the terminal

3 Making the electrical connectionsAlways make sure established guidelines for this type of terminal is followed during installation. When necessary use screened twisted-pair cables to minimize susceptibility. Otherwise use any kind of regular nonscreened tinned cable or equivalent.

When using screened cabling always use 360° full screen cable bushings to ensure screen cou-pling. Ensure that all signals of a single circuit are in the same single cable. Avoid mixing current and voltage measuring signals in the same cable. Also use separate cables for control and mea-suring circuits.

3.1 Connecting the CT circuitsCTs are connected using back-side mounted screw connectors.

Use a solid conductor with a cross section area between 2.5-6 mm2 (AWG14-10) or a stranded conductor with a cross section area between 2.5-4 mm2.

If the terminal is equipped with a test-switch of type RTXP 24 COMBIFLEX wires with 20 A sockets must be used to connect the CT circuits.

3.2 Connecting the auxiliary power, VT and signal connectorsAuxiliary power, VTs and signals are connected using COMBICON (Phoenix technology) plug-in screw connectors.

Procedure1. Connect signals to the COMBICON plug.

2. Plug the connector to the corresponding back-side mounted recept-able.

3. Lock the plug to the receptable by fastening the lock screws.

Use a solid or stranded conductor with a cross section area between 0.5-2.5 mm2 (AWG20-14). Use a ferrule with plastic collar to connect two conductors, cross section area between 0.5-1.5 mm2 (AWG20-16).

Note!Screened and twisted pair cables are a requirement for galvanic communications in application with 56/64 kbit/s. The screen must be earthed according to figures in the sections “Making the screen connection” and “Installing the communication cables”.

Page 47: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

34

Making the electrical connections Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Figure 6: Voltage connector, showing connection point X20:5

Figure 7: Connected cables with ferrules

Where: 1 is ferrule

X20

X20:5

(98000035)

1

Page 48: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

35

Making the electrical connections Chapter 5Installing the terminal

If the terminal is equipped with a test-switch of type RTXP 24 COMBIFLEX wires with 20 A sockets must be used to connect the VT circuits and the auxiliary power.

3.3 Connecting to protective earthConnect the unit to the earthing bar of the cubicle with a green/yellow conductor, cross section at least 1.5 mm2 (AWG16), connected to the protective earth connector at the back of the termi-nal.

3.4 Making the screen connectionWhen using screened cables always make sure screens are earthed and connected in according to applicable engineering methods. This may include checking for appropriate earthing points near the terminal, for instance, in the cubicle and/or near the source of measuring. Ensure that earth connections are made with short (max. 10 cm) conductors of an adequate cross section, at least 6 mm2 (AWG10) for single screen connections.

en03000087.vsd

Rx

Tx

Sc

Lc

Tx

Rx

Sc

LcCc

IED ExternalEquipment

Page 49: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

36

Installing the optical fibres Chapter 5Installing the terminal

4 Installing the optical fibresConnectors are generally color coded; connect blue or dark grey cable connectors to blue or dark grey (receive) back-side connectors. Connect black or grey cable connectors to black or grey (transmit) back-side connectors.

Caution!The fibre optical cables are very sensitive to handling. Do not bend too sharply. The minimum curvature radius is 15 cm for the plastic fibre cables and 25 cm for the glass fibre cables. If cable straps are used to fix the cables, apply with loose fit.

Always hold the connector, never the cable, when connecting or disconnecting optical fibres. Do not twist, pull or bend the fibre. Invisible damage may increase fibre attenuation thus making communication impossible.

Note!Please, strictly follow the instructions from the manufacturer for each type of optical ca-bles/connectors.

Page 50: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

37

Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

5 Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC

5.1 RS485 serial communication module

Figure 8: Pin arrangement on modem terminal. Baud rate: 9600

The distance between earth points should be < 100 m, see figure 9. Only the outer shielding is connected to the protective earth at the terminal. The inner and outer shieldings are connected to the protective earth at the external equipment. Use insulating tape for the inner shield to pre-vent contact with the protective earth. Make sure that the terminals are properly earthed with as short connections as possible from the earth screw, for example to an earthed frame.

The terminal and the external equipment should preferably be connected to the same battery.

Where:

A Signal A

B Signal B

1) Do not use

GND Ground

en03000109.vsd

AB

1)1)

1)

GND

Up

Page 51: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

38

Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Figure 9: Communication cable installation

en03000111.vsd

Cc

ExternalEquipment (PC)Terminal

A

PE

B

PE

A B

PE 1)

A B

PE

Terminal

Cc1)

Where:

1 The inner shields shall be connected together (with an isolated terminal block) and only have one earthing point in the whole system, preferably at the external equipment (PC).

The outer shield shall be connected to Protective Earth (PE) in every cable end i.e. to PE at all relay terminals and to PE at External equipment (PC). The first terminal will have only one cable end but all others of course two.

Cc Communication cable

PE Protective earth screw

Page 52: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

39

Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Figure 10: Cable contact, Phoenix: MSTB2.5/6-ST-5.08 1757051

The EIA standard RS-485 specifies the RS485 network. An informative excerpt is given in sec-tion 5.2.

5.2 Informative excerpt from EIA Standard RS-485Informative excerpt from EIA Standard RS-485 - Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems

RS-485 Wire - Media dependent Physical layer

Where:

1 is cable

2 is screw

en03000110.vsd

1

2

1 Normative references

EIA Standard RS-485 - Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems

2 Transmission method

RS-485 differential bipolar signaling

2.1 Differential signal levels

Two differential signal levels are defined:

A+ =line A positive with respect to line B

A- =line A negative with respect to line B

2.2 Galvanic isolation

The RS485 circuit shall be isolated from earth by:

Riso ≥ 10 MΩ

Ciso ≤ 10 pF

Page 53: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

40

Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Three isolation options exist:

a) The entire node electronics can be galvanically isolated

b) The bus interface circuit can be isolated form the rest of node electronics by optoisola-tors, transformer coupling or otherwise.

c) The RS485 chip can include built-in isolation

2.3 Bus excitation and signal conveyance

2.3.1 Requirements

a) The RS485 specification requires the Signal A and Signal B wires.

b) Each node also requires (5 V) Excitation of the RS485 termination network.

c) Vim - the common mode voltage between any pair of RS485 chips may not exceed 10 V.

d) A physical ground connection between all RS485 circuits will reduce noise.

2.3.2 Bus segment termination network

The termination network below required at each end of each Bus Ph-segment.

Figure 11: RS-485 bus segment termination

ExV is supplied by the Node at end of the Bus Segment

The specifications of the components are:

a) Ru + 5 V to Signal B = 390 Ω, 0.25 W ±2.5%

b) Rt Signal B to Signal A = 220 Ω, 0.25 W ±2.5%

c) Rd Signal A to GND = 390 Ω, 0.25 W ±2.5%

2.3.3 Bus power distribution

The end node in each Ph-segment applies 5 V bus excitation power to the Termination network via the Excitation pair (ExV+ and GND) used in the Type 3 Physical layer specification.

en03000112.vsd

ExV+

Signal B

Signal A

DGND

Ru = 390 ohm1/4 W, 2%

Rt = 220 ohm1/4 W, 2%

Rd = 390 ohm1/4 W, 2%

ExV is supplied by the Node at end of the Bus Segment

Page 54: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

41

Installing the serial communication cable for RS485 SPA/IEC

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

5.3 Data on RS485 serial communication module cable

Type: Twisted-pair S-STP (Screened – Screened Twisted Pair)

Shield: Individual foil for each pair with overall copper braid

Length: Maximum 100 m from one system earth to the next system earth (includes length from platform point to system earth on both sides)

Temp: According to application

Impedance: 120 Ω

Capacitance: Less than or equal to 42 pF/m

Example: Belden 9841

Page 55: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

42

Installing the 56/64 kbit data communication cables

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

6 Installing the 56/64 kbit data communication cablesWhen using galvanic connection between protection terminal and communication equipment or point to point galvanic connection between two protection terminals it is essential that the cable installation is carefully done. This is true regardless of type of module used, G.703, V.36, short range galvanic etc., only the possible length of the cable differs. The factors that must be taken into account are the susceptibility for noise disturbance, due to that the levels of the communi-cation signal are very low.

For best result a cable with twisted pairs and double screens should be used, one screen for each twisted pair and one surrounding all pairs. Each signal shall utilizie its own twisted pair as in figure 12. The screen for each separate pair shall be connected to internal screen or ground con-nection of equipment in one and the same end only, if available, or in other case connected to earth close to the equipment.

The outer screen surrounding all pairs shall be connected to a solid earth at each end close to the equipment.

Note also that recommendation about cable lengths given for modules according ITU/EIA inter-face, excluding the short range galvanic module, are under the assumption that the two devices, the protection terminal and the communication terminal, are within the same building and that the earthing system of the building is of good quality. It also presumes that the environment is relatively free from electromagnetic interference.

Page 56: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

43

Installing the 56/64 kbit data communication cables

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Figure 12: Communication cable installation

Cc Communication cable

Lc Line connector

Rx Receive input

Sc Screen (or earth/ground) connection

Tx Transmit output

en03000087.vsd

Rx

Tx

Sc

Lc

Tx

Rx

Sc

LcCc

IED ExternalEquipment

Page 57: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

44

Installing the 56/64 kbit data communication cables

Chapter 5Installing the terminal

Page 58: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

45

About this chapter Chapter 6Checking the external circuitry

Chapter 6 Checking the external circuitry

About this chapterThis chapter describes what to check and which checks that should be made to ensure a correct connection to the external circuitry, such as auxiliary power supply, CT’s and VT’s. These checks must be made with the protection terminal de-energised.

Page 59: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

46

Overview Chapter 6Checking the external circuitry

1 OverviewThe user must check the installation which includes verifying that the terminal is connected to the other parts of the protection system. This is done with the terminal and all connected circuits de-energised.

Page 60: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

47

Checking the CT and VT circuits Chapter 6Checking the external circuitry

2 Checking the CT and VT circuitsCheck that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied wiring diagram.

Test the circuitry. The following tests are recommended:

• Polarity check.• CT circuit current measurement (primary injection test).• Earthing check.

The polarity check verifies the integrity of the circuits and the phase relationship. The check should be performed as close as possible to the terminal.

The primary injection test verifies the CT ratio and the wiring all the way through from the pri-mary system to the terminal. Injection must be performed for each phase-to-neutral circuit and each phase-to-phase pair. In each case currents in all phases and the neutral line are measured.

Note!Do not continue further until any errors are corrected.

Page 61: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

48

Checking the power supply Chapter 6Checking the external circuitry

3 Checking the power supplyCheck that the value of the auxiliary supply voltage remains within the permissible range under all operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct.

Page 62: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

49

Checking the binary I/O circuits Chapter 6Checking the external circuitry

4 Checking the binary I/O circuits

4.1 Binary input circuitsPreferably, disconnect the binary input connector from the binary input cards. Check all con-nected signals so that both input level and polarity are in accordance with the terminal’s speci-fications.

4.2 Binary output circuitsPreferably, disconnect the binary output connector from the binary output cards. Check all con-nected signals so that both load and polarity are in accordance with the terminal’s specifications.

Page 63: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

50

Checking the binary I/O circuits Chapter 6Checking the external circuitry

Page 64: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

51

About this chapter Chapter 7Energising the terminal

Chapter 7 Energising the terminal

About this chapterThis chapter describes the start up sequence and what to check after the terminal has been eneri-gsed.

Page 65: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

52

Overview Chapter 7Energising the terminal

1 OverviewBefore the procedures in this chapter can be carried out the connection to external circuitry must have been checked which ensures that the installation was made correctly.

The user must energise the power supply to the terminal to start it up. This could be done in num-ber of ways, from energising a whole cubicle to energising a single terminal. The user should reconfigure the terminal to activate the hardware modules in order to enable the self supervision function detect eventual hardware errors. Then the terminal time must be set. The self supervi-sion function should also be checked to verify that the terminal unit operates properly. The user could also check the software version, the terminals serial number and the installed modules and their ordering number to ensure that the terminal is according to delivery and ordering specifi-cations.

Page 66: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

53

Energising the terminal Chapter 7Energising the terminal

2 Energising the terminalWhen the terminal is energised the window on the local HMI remains dark. After 10 seconds the green LED starts flashing and after approximately 30 seconds the window lights up. After an-other 10 seconds the window displays ‘Terminal Startup’ and after about 30 seconds the main menu is displayed. The upper row should indicate ‘Ready’. A steady green light indicates a suc-cessful startup.

Figure 13: Typical terminal startup sequence

If the upper row in the window indicates ‘Fail’ instead of ‘Ready’ and the green LED is flashing an internal failure in the terminal has been detected. See the self supervision function in this chapter to investigate the fault.

After startup the appearance of the local HMI should be as shown in figure 14.

1 Terminal energised. Liquide Crystal Display (LCD) is dark.

2 Green Light Emitting Diod (LED) starts flashing

3 LCD lights up

4 "Terminal startup" is displayed

5 The main menu is displayed. A steady green light indicates a successful startup.

xx02000679.vsd

t (s)0 3010 40 70

1 5432

Page 67: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

54

Energising the terminal Chapter 7Energising the terminal

Figure 14: Example of the local HMI531.

en00000422.vsd

E

C

ReadyREx 5xx Ver X.XC=QuitE=Enter menu

Start Trip

Push buttons

green yellow red

LEDs

Liquid Crystal Displayfour rows16 characters/row

Optical connectorfor local PC

Page 68: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

55

Checking the self supervision signals Chapter 7Energising the terminal

3 Checking the self supervision signals

3.1 Reconfiguring the terminalI/O modules configured as logical I/O modules (BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, IOPSM or MIM) are supervised. Not configured I/O modules are not supervised.

Each logical I/O module has an error flag that is set if anything is wrong with any signal or the whole module. The error flag is also set when there is no physical I/O module of the correct type present in the connected slot.

Procedure1. Browse to the ‘Reconfigure’ menu.

The Reconfigure menu is located in the local HMI under:

Configuration/I/O-modules/Reconfigure

2. Select ‘Yes’ and press ‘E’.

3.2 Setting the terminal timeThis procedure describes how to set the terminal time.

1. Display the set time dialog.

Navigate the menus to:

Settings/Time

Press the E button to enter the dialog.

2. Set the date and time.

Use the Left and Right arrow buttons to move between the time and date values (year, month, day, hours, minutes and seconds). Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to change the value.

3. Confirm the setting.

Press the E button to set the calendar and clock to the new values.

3.3 Checking the self supervision function

3.3.1 Navigating the menusThis procedure describes how to navigate the menus in order to find the reason of an internal failure when indicated by the flashing green LED of the HMI module.

Page 69: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

56

Checking the self supervision signals Chapter 7Energising the terminal

Procedure1. Display the self supervision menu.

Navigate the menus to:

TerminalReportSelfSuperv

2. Scroll the supervision values to identify the reason of the failure.

Use the Left and/or Right arrow buttons to scroll between values.

3.4 Self supervision HMI dataTable 1: Output signals for the self supervision function

Indicated result Possible reason Proposed action

InternFail = OK No problem detected. None.

InternFail = Fail A failure has occurred. Check the rest of the indicated results to find the fault.

InternWarning = OK No problem detected. None.

InternWarning = Warning A warning has been issued.

Check the rest of the indicated results to find the fault.

MPM-modFail = OK No problem detected. None.

MPM-modFail = Fail The main processing mod-ule has failed.

Contact your ABB representative for service.

MPM-modWarning = OK No problem detected. None.

MPM-modWarning = Warning

There is a problem with:• the real time clock.• the time synchroniza-

tion.

Set the clock.If the problem persists, contact your ABB repre-sentative for service.

ADC-module = OK No problem detected. None.

ADC-module = Fail The A/D conversion mod-ule has failed.

Contact your ABB representative for service.

Slot04BIM1 = Fail(Example data, see fol-lowing section for details)

I/O module has failed. Check that the I/O module has been configured and connected to the IOP1- block.If the problem persists, contact your ABB repre-sentative for service.

RealTimeClock = OK No problem detected. None.

RealTimeClock = Warn-ing

The real time clock has been reset.

Set the clock.

TimeSync = OK No problem detected. None.

TimeSync = Warning No time synchronization. Check the synchronization source for problems. If the problem persists, contact your ABB repre-sentative for service.

Page 70: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

57

About this chapter Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Chapter 8 Configuring the 56/64 kbit data communication modules

About this chapterThis chapter contains instructions on how to configure the 56/64 kbit data communication mod-ules, such as galvanic and optical modems.

Page 71: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

58

Configuring the fibre optical modem Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

1 Configuring the fibre optical modemTwo different levels of optical output power can be set on the HMI under:

Configuration/TerminalCom/RemTermCom/OptoPower

For the optical module, the optical output power has to be set according to the total attenuation of the fibre optic link.

For multimode fibres:

• If the total attenuation is less than 3 dB, use Low power setting• If the total attenuation is higher than 3 dB, use High power setting

For single-mode fibres:

• If the total attenuation is less than 2 dB, use Low power setting• If the total attenuation is higher than 2 dB, use High power setting

For optimal operation, the optical communication modules in both terminals must be synchro-nized. To achieve this, one terminal acts as a Master and the other as a Slave. This is set under:

Configuration/TerminalCom/RemTermCom/CommSync

When communicating with FOX 515 Plus, the setting should be Master for version 2.0 and high-er. Slave for version 1.1 and 1.2.

When operating back-to-back over dedicated fibres the setting shall be Master on one terminal and Slave on the other.

Note!Total attenuation is fibers, contacts, splices etc.

Note!This is an additional setting and should not be mixed up with the Master-Slave setting for the differential protection function.

Page 72: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

59

Calculation of optical power budget Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

2 Calculation of optical power budgetRefer to table 2 and table 3 for maximum distance in a back-to-back application

Table 2: Input data for calculation of optical power budget

Table 3: Examples of optical power budget calculation

General data Attenuation

Type of optical Tx/Rx-module 0

Bit rate 64 kbit/s

Transmission code MCMI

Optical fibre Single mode

Optical connector FC-PC

Optical wavelength 1300 nm

Spectral bandwidth 30.0 nm

Transmitter Tx LED

Optical min output power (S) -22 dBm

Receiver Rx Pin Diode

Sensitivity for BER 0 1010 (R) -38 dBm

Available power budget -16 dB

Terminal equipment Example 1 Example 2

Available power budget (S_R) 16 dB 16 dB

Equipment margin Included Included

Type of optical connectors FC-PC for single mode

Terminal box

Patch panel connectors FC-PC for single mode 0 0

Connectors for S-R 0.5 dB each Included Included

Total available optical power 16 dB 16 dB

Optical cable

Type of optical fibre Single mode 1300 nm

Fibre attenuation (installed) 0.22 dB/km 0.34 dB/km

Splice attenauation 0.08 dB per splice

Av. cable length between splices 3.0 km

Average number of splices 0.33 splice/km 0.027 dB/km 0.027 dB/km

Number of repair splices 0.10 splice/km 0.008 dB/km 0.008 dB/km

Fibre margin 0.010 dB/km 0.010dB/km

Total fibre attenuation per km 0.265 dB/km 0.385 dB/km

Maximum optical transmission dis-tance

60 km 41 km

Page 73: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

60

Configuring the short range fibre optical modem

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

3 Configuring the short range fibre optical modemNo setting is available for the short range fibre optical modem on the HMI. There are however some settings that can be made on a DIP-switch located behind the cover around the fibre optic connectors at the back of the terminal according to figure 15. After the fibres have been discon-nected, if attached, the cover plate can be removed by pulling the middle of the cover plate.

Figure 15: Setting and indications for the short range optical modem

Switch 3 and 4 are used to set the source of timing. The function is according to the setting of timing signal, table 4. When using the modem for optical point-to-point transmission, one mo-dem should be set for locally created timing and the other for timing recovered from the received signal. When the modems are communicating with a transceiver 21-15X or 16X the modems shall be set for timing recovered from received optical signal, see setting of timing signal.

Note! If handled carefully the cover plate can be removed with the fibres attached.

Fibre opticconnectors

Coverplate On Off

TXDCTSRTSMALASync

RXDDSRDCDRALOSync

1234

Reset

xx00000552.vsd

Note!After any change of settings, the modem has to be reset by the Reset button located below the DIP-switch.

Page 74: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

61

Configuring the short range fibre optical modem

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 4: Setting of the timing signal

There are also some jumpers on the circuit board that have to be correctly set. One, S4 according to figure 17, is for changing the functionality between article number 1MRK 001 370-BA deliv-ered with version 1.1, 1.2 and 2.0.(marked 1MRK001471-BA) and 1MRK 001 370-DA deliv-ered with version 2.3 and higher (marked 1MRK001471-DA). The difference between these two is that the transmitted and received signals are inverted in relation to one another.

When a terminal of version 1.1, 1.2 or 2.0 is to communicate with a terminal of version 2.3 or higher it is necessary that the jumper is changed to 1 MRK 001 370-BA in the version 2.3 ter-minal. This is because older versions of this module lack the capacity to set article number, they are set in 1 MRK 001 370-BA. If both terminals however include modules with capacity to change article number it actually doesn’t matter which article number is used as long as the same number is used in both terminals.

The other jumper is S3 and must be in the position indicated in figure 17. If it is in the top posi-tion the communication will not work. (In top position the transmit clock is supposed to be cre-ated in the CPU on the MPM module which is not possible). On JTAG/ISP there shall be no jumpers inserted.

Figure 16: Multiplexed link, short range fibre optical connection

Switch no. Function

3 4

OFF OFF Timing created by the modem

OFF ON Timing recovered from received optical signal

ON OFF Timing created by the MPM module

ON ON No timing, the data transmission will not work

Note!When using the set up in figure 16 only at one end and for example a direct G.703 connection at the other end a short range fibre optical modem according to 1MRK 001 370-DA must be used.

xx00000542vsd

REx5xx

Opticalfibres 21-15X/16X V.35/36 (15X)

X.21 (16X)G.703 (16X)

Page 75: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

62

Configuring the short range fibre optical modem

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Figure 17: Jumper location on short range optical modem

The jumpers are accessible after the modem has been pulled out. This is done by first removing all green 18-pin connectors at the back, then remove all screws holding the back plate. After the back plate has been removed the modem can be pulled out.

There are LEDs for supervision of the communication channel that can be seen when the cover around the fibre optic connectors is removed. These LED’s are found above the DIP-switches. The function of the LED’s is explained in table 5.

1 Delivered with version 1.1, 1.2 and 2.0

2 Delivered with version 2.3 or higher

xx01000138.vsd

1S3

S41MRK001471-BA

1MRK001471-DA

JTAG/ISP

12

Note!Pull out the modem only and not the whole double size Euro-card. After the jumper settings have been changed put everything back in reverse order.

Note!All electronics are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Proper action must be taken at the work place to avoid electrostatic discharge! Disconnect DC.

Page 76: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

63

Configuring the short range fibre optical modem

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 5: Indications

LED Color Explanation

RTS Yellow Request to send

CTS Yellow Clear to send

DSR Yellow Data communication correct

DCD Yellow Detection of carrier signal

TXD Yellow Transmitted data

RXD Yellow Received data

RA Red Remotely detected problem with link

MA Red Memory function for problem with link

LO Green Link operation correctly

LA Red Locally detected problem with link

Sync Green Used when synchronization is selected

Page 77: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

64

Configuring the short range galvanic modem Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

4 Configuring the short range galvanic modemNo setting is available for the short range galvanic modem on the HMI. There are however some settings that can be made on the DIP-switch located behind the cover around the line connector at the back of the terminal as shown in figure 18. After the connector has been disconnected, if attached, the cover plate can be removed by pulling the middle of the cover plate. No settings are located on the circuit board.

Figure 18: Setting and indications for short range galvanic modem

Only switch 1 and 2 are used on the DIP-switch. The function is dependant on the setting of the timing signal, see table 6. In normal operation switch 1 is set in ON position at one end of the communication channel and switch 2 is set ON at the other end. The rest of the switches are set to OFF.

Table 6: Setting of timing signal

There are also LEDs for the supervision of the communication channel that can be seen when the cover around the fibre optic connectors is removed. These LED’s are found below the DIP-switch. The function of the LED’s is explained in table 7.

Switch no. Function

1 2

OFF OFF Unpredictable, normally locally created timing

OFF ON Timing recovered from received signal

ON OFF Locally created timing

ON ON Timing recovered from received signal

xx00000555.vsd

Coverplate

OnOff1234

DCDRDTD

12345

Lineconnector

Page 78: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

65

Configuring the short range galvanic modem Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 7: Indications

LED Explanation

DCD Detection of carrier signal

TD Transmitted data

RD Received data

Page 79: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

66

Configure the interface modules for V.36, X.21 and RS530

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

5 Configure the interface modules for V.36, X.21 and RS530The connector for X.21 is a 15 pin DSUB according to the X.21 standard. For RS530 the con-nector is a 25 pin DSUB according to the RS530 standard. The same 25 pin DSUB is also used for the V.36 connection contrary to the 37 pin DSUB listed in the standard. The pin lay-out is shown in figure 19 and pin designations are explained in table 19.

Figure 19: DSUB connectors

Table 8: DSUB connector explanation

Designation Explanation

A Designations of terminals according to ITU (CCITT), EIA etc.

B Designations of terminals according to ITU (CCITT), EIA etc.

DCE Data communication equipment (= multiplexer, etc.)

DTE Data terminal equipment (= protection)

DTE READY Data terminal ready (follows auxiliary voltage)

GND Earth (reference for signals)

RCLK Receiver signal timing

REQ SEND Request to send (follows auxiliary voltage)

* not for V.36

8 GND76 RCLK54 RXD(A)32 TXD (A)1 SCREEN

1514

RCLK(B) 1312

RXD(B) 11 10

TXD (B) 9

15 pin DSUB

X.21

25 pin DSUB

1312 TCLK DCE (B)11 TCLK DTE (B)109 RCLK (B)87 GND654 REQ SEND (A)3 RXD (A)2 TXD (A)1 SCREEN

25TCLK DTE(A) 24

DTE READY(B)* 232221

DTE READY(A) 20REQ SEND (B)* 19

18RCLK(A) 17

RXD(B) 16TCLK DCE(A) 15

TXD (B) 14

V.36, RS530

xx00000544.vsd

Page 80: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

67

Configure the interface modules for V.36, X.21 and RS530

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

For the co-directional operation the transmission rate of the transmitted signal must be set.This setting, 56 or 64 kbit/s, is done on the HMI under:

Configuration/TerminalCom/RemTermCom/BitRate

For X.21 and contra-directional operation no settings are available.

For the signals used by the protection, the communication module for V.36 also fulfils the older recommendation for V.35.

RXD Received data

SCREEN Connection of cable screen

TCLK DCE Transmitter signal timing from DCE

TCLK DTE Transmitter signal timing from DTE

TXD Transmitter data

Designation Explanation

Page 81: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

68

Configuring the interface modules for G.703 co-directional

Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

6 Configuring the interface modules for G.703 co-directionalNo setting is available for the G.703 modem on the HMI. There are however some settings that can be made on a DIP-switch located behind the cover around the line connector at the back of the terminal according to figure 20. After the connector has been disconnected, if attached, the cover plate can be removed just by pulling at the middle of the cover plate. No settings are lo-cated on the circuit board.

Only switch 1 is used on the DIP-switch. In the ON position, transmission timing is generated internally in the modem. In the OFF position, transmission timing is generated by the received G.703 signal. Normally the OFF position shall be used when the terminal is connected to a mul-tiplexer or other communication equipment.If used in back to back operation switch 1 is set in ON position at one end and in OFF position at the other end. The rest of the switches shall be set to OFF.

There are also LEDs for supervision of the communication channel that can be seen when the cover around the fibre optic connectors is removed. These LED’s are located below the DIP-switch. The function of the LED’s isexplained in table 9.

Figure 20: G.703 modem, indications and settings

Table 9: Indications

A Line connector

B Cover plate

LED Explanation

TD Transmitted data

RD Received data

xx01000137.vsd

B

12345

A

On1234

TXDRXD

Page 82: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

69

Fault tracing Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

7 Fault tracingProcedure1. Check that the settings are correct.

2. Check that the optical budget is correct.

3. COMFAIL occurs for the following reasons:

The COMFAIL signal will be triggered when there is a problem in the communication link be-tween the two terminals, depending on type of 56/64 modem. Also, normal actions such as a change of setting, switch off of remote terminal during maintenance etc., can cause COMFAIL.

7.0.1 Comfail function

Figure 21: Comfail triggering.

The 200 ms alarm dropout delay is, for example, required as hysteresis for terminals with reserve overcurrent, REL 551 or distance reserve function REL 561, if the differential function is blocked by communication delays and interruptions etc.

The communication failure signal, COMFAIL, depends on the following internal signals (vari-ables) in each terminal for REx 5xx. Table 10 shows a summary with additional explanations below.

Drop-out delay; t = 200ms

COMFAIL triggering according to table

COMFAIL t

en03000125.vsd

Page 83: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

70

Fault tracing Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 10: Summary

7.0.2 Explanation of contents in column 2 of table 421. Transmit errors are due to that the terminal cannot send messages via the tele-

communication channel (PCM). The line differential function initiates the send-ing of one message every 5 ms. If this command can not be executed for 10 consecutive times (= 10 x 5 ms) due to blocked, missing or unsynchronized com-munication channel, COMFAIL is triggered. For non-consecutive interruptions, an integration algorithm is used that prolongs the COMFAIL triggering time.

2. Receive errors occur when no expected messages are received. The line differen-tial function expects to receive one message every 5 ms. If this does not occur 10 consecutive times (= 10x5 ms), COMFAIL is triggered. For non-consecutive in-terruptions, an integration algorithm is used that prolongs the COMFAIL trigger-ing time.

No. COMFAIL triggering COMFAIL trigger-ing time (Drop-out delay 200 ms)

Remark

1 Transmit error ≥ 50 ms Messages can not be sent

2 Receive error ≥ 100 ms No valid messages received

3 Block differential protection 0 ms Block of the differential protection due to set-ting changes etc.

4 Remote terminal COMFAIL 0 ms COMFAIL from the remote terminal. For error no 1, 2, 3, and no 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 the COM-FAIL is sent in the second consecutive mes-sage (within 10 ms)

5 Time synchronization error ≥ 2 s Problems in the synchronization of internal differential clock in the differential protection. The clock refers to the synchronized counters 0-39999 μs in each terminal. The clock is independent of the real time clock in the ter-minal.

6 Differential clock drift > 0 ms Unacceptable drift of the internal differential clock in the slave terminal compared to the internal differential clock in the master termi-nal (slave- master -slave)

7 Communication channel loop delay - instantaneous

0 ms Checks if the loop time (slave - master -slave) in the differential communication channel 31 ms

8 Communication channel loop delay - time delayed

≥ 2 s Checks if the loop time (local - remote- local) in the differential communication channel 24 ms

9 Abnormal clock deviation 0 ms Internal differential clock deviation (slave- master - slave)

10 Data flow

Only in version *2.3

0 ms Long time between attempts to send mes-sages and adjustment of the real time termi-nal clock . The terminal clock is the real time clock in the terminal for time tagging of events etc.

Page 84: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

71

Fault tracing Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

3. Block differential protection. Block of differential protection occurs during change of settings or setting group.

4. Remote terminal COMFAIL. For error No 1, 2, 3 and No 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 the COMFAIL is sent in the second consecutive message (within 10 ms). Thus, some short interruptions can be recorded only in one terminal. The communication channel must be in operation to be able to receive this signal.

5. Time synchronization error refers to synchronization check and is only per-formed by the terminal set as Slave for the internal differential clocks synchroni-zation. If 50 time synchronization messages (included with every 8 line differential function message) are not correctly received (= 8 x 5 ms x 50 = 2000 ms), COMFAIL will be triggered. If more than 750 synchronization messages are not correctly received, a re-synchronization of the internal differential clock will be made. For non-consecutive interruptions, an integration algorithm prolongs the COMFAIL triggering time.

6. Differential Clock drift refers to a difference > 50 ms between the internal differ-ential clocks in the differential protection in the terminal set as Slave and the one set as Master for synchronization of the internal differential clock. The COM-FAIL triggering time depends on a number of factors from a drift compensation algorithm. This check is normally not activated unless the communication chan-nel has been lost for a long time.

7. Communication channel loop delay-instantaneous is checked every 40 ms (at each synchronization message). If the communication channel loop (Slave-Mas-ter-Slave) delay is more than 31ms for one message, COMFAIL is triggered in-stantaneously. This check is done in the terminal set as Slave for the internal differential clock by a comparison with the real time clock in the terminal at send-ing and receiving of a looped message.

8. Communication channel loop delay-time delayed checks if the communication channel delay for transmitted and received signal is >24 ms (Local-Remote-Lo-cal). The check is performed every 40 ms (at each synchronization message) by comparing the real time clock time at sending and receiving of a looped message. COMFAIL is triggered after 50 consecutive messages with excessive loop time. COMFAIL triggering time = 2000 ms (= 50x40 ms). For non-consecutive mes-sages with excessive loop time, an integration algorithm is used that prolongs the COMFAIL triggering.

9. Abnormal clock deviation checks if the synchronization in the Slave of the inter-nal differential clocks in the differential protection have an abnormal deviation, (Slave-Master–Slave). COMFAIL is triggered instantaneously, but will probably only occur after long interruptions in the communication channel. However, the start or re synchronization procedure can also activate COMFAIL due to this function.

10. Data flow checks if the time between initiations of the sending messages from the line differential function is longer than 20 ms, using the real time clock for the check. This check will also trigger the COMFAIL if the external time synchroni-zation of the real time clock by minute pulse or SPA/LON from Station Clock or GPS, adjusts the terminal clock forward > 15 ms. The COMFAIL triggering is instantaneous. The channel interruption measurements for short, medium and long interruptions, presented on the HMI are based on measurements of timing from the real time clock which are made independently in each terminal. These measurements are also independent from the internal differential clock. The mea-

Page 85: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

72

Fault tracing Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

surements presented on the front HMI are not connected to COMFAIL or by in-dications of channel delay exceeding 12 ms, since the delay is not a channel interrupt, the channel is still working.

Page 86: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

73

Configuring the transceiver 21-15xx Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

8 Configuring the transceiver 21-15xxFollow the instructions, for setting of jumpers, given in the document delivered with the trans-ceiver.

Here follow some recommendations on settings and connections when operating together with protection systems from ABB. In the following the transceiver is regarded as a DTE (although it is actually designed as a DCE) and is supposed to be connected to communication equipment that acts as a DCE.

For synchronous communication a DCE always has to output timing signals (TC and RC) and one input timing signal (TTC). For the DTE the opposite is valid. All clocks in a synchronous network have the same timing and provided the phase is set correctly they also have the same phase. This means that only one clock signal has to be used between the transceiver and the com-munication as shown in the cases below.

Page 87: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

74

Co-directional operation Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

9 Co-directional operationThe connection is made according to table 11.

Table 11: Connections

Figure 22 shows the connection. If needed for proper operation of the communication equipment a connection can be made between the RC and TC. Both TD and RD are controlled from TTC.

Figure 22: Connection between transceiver and communication equipment

The transceiver is set according to table 12.

Transceiver

Pin No.

V.35 V.36 Comm. eq.

Signal No A B A B Signal No Direction

TD 103 P S 4 22 RD 104 Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

RD 104 R T 6 24 TD 103 Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

TTC 113 U W 17 35 RC 115 Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Tranceiver Communicationequipment

RD(A)RD(B)

TD(A)TD(B)

RC(A)RC(B)

TC(A)TC(B)

TD(A)TD(B)

RD(A)RD(B)

TTC(A)TTC(B)

en01000190.vsd

Page 88: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

75

Co-directional operation Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 12: Settings

Switch, jumper Setting Gives

S1 Middle position V.35

S1 Bottom position V.36

S2 9 64 kbit/s

S3 Middle position External clock

S4 Has no influence on operation ---

Page 89: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

76

Contra-directional operation Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

10 Contra-directional operationConnected according to table 13.

Table 13: Connections

Figure 23 shows the connection. In this case the connection to TTC can be made either from RC or TC but not from both. Both TD and RD are controlled from TTC.

Figure 23: Connection between transceiver and communication equipment

Setting of transceiver is done according to table 14.

Transceiver

Pin No.

V.35 V.36 Comm. eq.

Signal No A B A B Signal No Direction

TD 103 P S 4 22 RD 104 Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RD 104 R T 6 24 TD 103 Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

TTC 113 U W 17 35 1) 1) Comm. eq. -> Transceiver1) Either RC - 115 or TC - 114 can be used.

where:

1 is the selection between either RC or TC

Tranceiver Communicationequipment

RD(A)RD(B)

TD(A)TD(B)

RC(A)RC(B)

TC(A)TC(B)

TD(A)TD(B)

RD(A)RD(B)

TTC(A)TTC(B)

en01000191.vsd

1)

1)

Page 90: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

77

Contra-directional operation Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 14: Settings

Switch, jumper Setting Gives

S1 Middle position V.35

S1 Bottom position V.36

S2 9 64 kbit/s

S3 Middle position External clock

S4 Has no influence on operation ---

Page 91: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

78

Configuring the transceiver 21-16xx Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

11 Configuring the transceiver 21-16xxFor setting jumpers, follow the instructions in the document delivered with the transceiver.

Here follow some recommendations on settings and connections when using protection systems from ABB. In the following, the transceiver is regarded as a DTE and is supposed to be connect-ed to communication equipment that acts as a DCE.

11.1 X.21 operationThe connection is made according to table 15.

Table 15: Connections

Figure 24 shows the connection.

Figure 24: Connection between transceiver and communication equipment

Set transceiver according to table 16.

Transceiver Comm. eq.

Pin No.

Signal A B Signal Direction

T 2 9 T Comm. eq -> Transceiver

R 4 11 R Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

S 6 13 S Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Tranceiver Communicationequipment

T(A)T(B)

R(A)R(B)

S(A)S(B)

T(A)T(B)

R(A)R(B)

S(A)S(B)

en01000192.vsd

Page 92: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

79

Configuring the transceiver 21-16xx Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 16: Settings

11.2 G.703 co-directional operationConnect according to table 17.

Table 17: Connections

If a screen is available in the cable it is connected to Protection Ground (pin 9 on the transceiver) at one or both ends.

Figure 25 shows the connection. Note that the signal directions are according to DCE operation for both transceiver and communication equipment.

Figure 25: Connection between Transceiver and Communication equipment

Set transceiver according to table 18.

Switch, jumper Setting Gives

S2, S3, S4, S15, S16 Jumpers downwards DTE

S6 Second position from bottom X.21

S11 9 64 kbit/s

S14 Jumper at middle position External clock

S13 Has no influence on operation ---

Transceiver Comm. eq.

Signal Pin1) Signal Direction

TX 1/2 RX Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RX 3/4 TX Transceiver -> Comm. eq.1) RJ-45 connector. Numbered from left the connection points will bet this number

en01000193.vsd

Tranceiver Communicationequipment

RX(A)RX(B)

TX(A)TX(B)

TX(A)TX(B)

RX(A)RX(B)

Page 93: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

80

Configuring the transceiver 21-16xx Chapter 8Configuring the 56/64 kbit data

communication modules

Table 18: Settings

Switch, jumper Setting

S5 G.703 co - con, balanced Nx64 kbps

S6 Co-directional

S7 Has no influence on operation

S8 Has no influence on operation

S9 Has no influence on operation

S11 9 (64 kbit/s)

S14 timing source External clock

S14 sync No jumper

S13 Has no influence on operation

Page 94: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

81

About this chapter Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

Chapter 9 Setting and configuring the terminal

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to set the terminal, either through a PC or the local HMI, and down-load a configuration to the terminal in order to make commissioning possible.

The chapter does not contain instructions on how to create a configuration or calculate settings. Please consult the application manual for further information about how to calculate settings.

Page 95: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

82

Overview Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

1 OverviewThe customer specific values for each setting parameter and a configuration file has to be avail-able before the terminal can be set and configured, if the terminal is not delivered with a config-uration.

Use the CAP 531 configuration tool to verify if the terminal has the expected configuration. A new configuration is performed with the CAP tool. The binary outputs can be selected from a signal list where the signals are grouped under their function names. It is also possible to specify a user-defined name for each input and output signal.

The configuration can be downloaded through the front connector on the local HMI or via the rear SPA port.

Each function included in the terminal has several setting parameters which have to be set in or-der to make the terminal behave as intended. A default value is provided for each parameter from factory. A setting file can be prepared using the parameter setting tool (PST), which is available in the CAP 540 package.

All settings can be:

• Entered manually through the local HMI.• Downloaded from a PC, either locally or remotely using SMS/SCS. Front or rear

port communication has to be established before the settings can be downloaded.

Note!Be sure to configure the functional input HMI--BLOCKSET to only one of the available binary inputs before setting the parameter SettingRestrict to Block in the local HMI.

Page 96: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

83

Entering settings through the local HMI Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

2 Entering settings through the local HMIEach of the included functions in the terminal has to be set and this can be performed through the local HMI. The user must browse to the desired function and enter the appropriate value. The parameters for each function can be found in the local HMI. See the technical reference manual for a complete list of setting parameters for each function. Some of the included functions may not be used. In this case the user can set the parameter “Operation” to “Off” to disable the func-tion.

Some settings can only be set through the local HMI, such as the setting access, the slave number and baud rate when communicating with a PC software. The setting access can be blocked by the binary input signal HMI--BLOCKSET. When this signal is active the user can still read all information, including the setting values.

Page 97: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

84

Configuring the setting restriction of HMI function

Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

3 Configuring the setting restriction of HMI functionConfiguring the HMI--BLOCKSET functional signal can only be done from the local HMI.

Figure 26: Connection and logic diagram for the HMI--BLOCKSET functional signal

Procedure1. Navigate the menus to:

Configuration/BuiltInHMI/HMI--BLOCKSET

2. Select a binary input

Select a binary input not used or reserved for any other purpose.

Connect the selected binary input to the DC control voltage via a normally closed contact of a control switch, which can be locked by a key. Only when the normally closed contact is open, the change of settings and configuration of the REx 5xx terminal is possible. See figure 26.

SettingRestrict=Block RESTRICTSETTINGS

HMI--BLOCKSET

&SWITCH

WITH KEY

+

REx 5xx

en01000152.vsd

Page 98: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

85

Activating the restriction of setting Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

4 Activating the restriction of setting

4.1 Local HMIActivating the restriction of setting via local HMI can only be done from the local HMI.

Procedure1. Navigate the menus to:

Configuration/BuiltInHMI/SettingRestrict

2. Set SettingRestrict = Block.

4.2 Serial communication, change of active groupActivating the restriction of setting, or change of active group via the rear communication port, can only be done from the local HMI.

Procedure1. Navigate the menus to:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPACom/Rear/ActGrpRestrict

2. Set ActGrpRestrict = Block

4.3 Serial communication, settingActivating the restriction of setting or change of active group, can only be done from the local HMI.

Procedure1. Navigate the menus to:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPACom/Rear/SettingRestrict

2. Set SettingRestrict = Block

Note!The HMI--BLOCKSET functional input must be configured to the selected binary input before setting the setting restriction function in operation. Carefully read the instructions.

Page 99: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

86

Downloading settings and configuration from a PC

Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

5 Downloading settings and configuration from a PC

5.1 Establishing front port communicationWhen a PC is used to download settings and configuration, you need the terminal toolbox CAP 540 (including CAP 531 and PST).

A special cable is needed when connecting a PC to the front of the REx 5xx terminal. This cable can be ordered from ABB. It must be plugged into the optical contact on the left side of the local HMI. The other end of the cable shall be plugged directly into the COM-port on the PC. The cable includes an optical contact, an opto/electrical converter and an electrical cable with a stan-dard 9-pole D-sub contact. This ensures a disturbance-free and safe communication with the ter-minal.

When communicating from a PC, the slave number and baud rate (communication speed) set-tings must be equal in the PC-program and in the REx 5xx terminal.

Procedure1. Plug the cable to the optical contact on the local HMI.

2. Plug the other end of the cable to the COM port of the PC.

3. Set the slave number and baud rate in the terminal.

The slave number and baud rate settings in the REx 5xx terminal is done on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPACom/Front

4. Set the slave number and baud rate in the PC-program.

The slave number and baud rate must be the same as in the terminal. See the CAP 540 manual.

5.2 Establishing rear port communicationSettings can be performed via any of the optical ports at the rear of the REx 5xx terminal. When a PC is connected to the SMS system, the CAP 540 and the PST softwares are used. Settings can also be done via the SCS system, based on MicroLIBRARY.

5.2.1 Using the SPA/IEC rear portFor all settings and configuration via the SPA communication bus, the SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port on the rear, it is necessary to first deactivate the restriction for settings. Otherwise, no setting is allowed. This setting only applies for the SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port during SPA bus com-munication. The parameter can only be set on the local HMI, and is located at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPACom/Rear/SettingRestrict

It is also possible to permit changes between active setting groups with ActGrpRestrict in the same menu section.

Page 100: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

87

Downloading settings and configuration from a PC

Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

Selecting the protocols for the rear ports To define the protocols to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI under the menu:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPA-IEC-LON

When the protocols have been selected the terminal will automatically restart.

When communicating with SMS or SCS with the SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol the slave number and baud rate (communication speed) settings must be equal in the PC-program and in the REx 5xx terminal.

Using the SPA rear portThe slave number and baud rate settings of the rear SPA port on the REx 5xx terminal, for SPA bus communication, is done on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPACom/Rear

Using IEC 870-5-103 rear portThe slave number and baud rate settings of the rear IEC 60870-5-103 port on the REx 5xx ter-minal, for IEC 870-5-103 bus communication, is done on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/IECCom/Communication

5.2.2 Using LON rear portThe LON port is not affected by eventual restricted settings valid for the SPA/IEC port. When communicating via the LON port, the settings are done with the LNT, LON Network Tool. The settings are shown on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/LON Com

From this menu, it is also possible to send the “ServicePinMsg” to the LNT.

5.3 Downloading the configuration and setting filesWhen downloading a configuration to the REx 5xx terminal with the CAP 531 configuration tool, the terminal is automatically set in configuration mode. When the terminal is set in config-uration mode, all functions are blocked. The red LED on the terminal flashes, and the green LED is lit while the terminal is in the configuration mode.

When the configuration is downloaded and completed, the terminal is automatically set into nor-mal mode. For further instructions please refer to the users manuals for CAP 540 and PST.

Page 101: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

88

Downloading settings and configuration from a PC

Chapter 9Setting and configuring the terminal

Page 102: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

89

About this chapter Chapter 10Requirement of trig condition for

disturbance report

Chapter 10 Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to override the limitation on the storage capacity of the flash mem-ory.

Page 103: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

90

Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report

Chapter 10Requirement of trig condition for

disturbance report

1 Requirement of trig condition for disturbance reportDisturbance reports, setting and internal events in REx 5xx are stored in a non volatile flash memory. Flash memories are used in many embedded solutions for storing information due to high reliability, high storage capacity, short storage time and small size.

In REx 5xx there is a potential failure problem, caused by too many write operations to the flash memory.

Our experience shows that after storing more than fifty thousand disturbances, settings or inter-nal events the flash memory exceeds its storing capacity and the component is finally defected.

When the failure occurs there is no risk of unwanted operation of the protection terminal due to the self-supervision function that detects the failure. The terminal will give a signal for internal fail and go into blocking mode.

The above limitation on the storage capacity of the flash memory gives the following recom-mendation for the disturbance report trig condition:

• Cyclic trig condition more often then once/day not recommended.• Minute pulse input is not used as a trig condition.• Total number of stored disturbance reports shall not exceed fifty thousand.

Page 104: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

91

About this chapter Chapter 11Establishing connection and

verifying theSPA/IEC-communication

Chapter 11 Establishing connection and verifying the SPA/IEC-communication

About this chapterThis chapter contains instructions on how to establish connection and verify that the SPA/IEC-communication operates as intended, when the terminal is connected to a monitoring or control system via the rear SPA/IEC port.

Page 105: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

92

Entering settings Chapter 11Establishing connection and

verifying the

1 Entering settingsIf the terminal is connected to a monitoring or control system via any of the rear SPA and/or IEC ports, the applicable selection of protocols for the rear ports must be made.

1.1 Entering SPA settingsWhen using the SPA protocol, the rear SPA/IEC port must be set for SPA use.

The SPA/IEC port is located at terminal X13 on the rear side of the terminal. Three types of interfaces can be used:

• for plastic fibres with connector type HFBR• for glass fibres with connectors type ST• for galvanic RS485

Procedure1. Set the operation of the rear SPA/IEC port to “SPA”.

The operation of the rear SPA/IEC port can be found on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPA-IEC-LON

When the setting is entered the terminal will automatically restart. After the restart the SPA/IEC port operates as a SPA port.

2. Set the slave number and baud rate for the rear SPA port

The slave number and baud rate can be found on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPACom/Rear

Set the same slave number and baud rate as set in the SMS system for the terminal.

1.2 Entering IEC settingsWhen using the IEC protocol, one of the rear ports must be set for IEC use. The selected port can be located at terminal X13 or terminal X15 on the rear side of the terminal. Valid interface depends on selected port.Three types of interfaces can be used:

• for plastic fibres with connector type HFBR• for glass fibres with connectors type ST• for galvanic RS485

Procedure1. Set the operation of one of the rear ports to “IEC”.

The operation of the rear ports can be found on the local HMI at:

Page 106: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

93

Entering settings Chapter 11Establishing connection and

verifying theSPA/IEC-communication

Configuration/TerminalCom/SPA-IEC-LON

When the setting is entered the terminal will automatically restart. After the restart the selected IEC port operates as a IEC port.

2. Set the slave number and baud rate for the rear IEC port

The slave number and baud rate can be found on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/IECCom/Communication

Set the same slave number and baud rate as set in the IEC master system for the terminal.

3. Set the main function type of the terminal.

The main function type can be found on the local HMI at:

Configuration/TerminalCom/IECCom/FunctionType

The main function type can be set to values from 1 to 255 according to the standard. The value zero is default and corresponds to not used. Ex-amples of values that can be used are:

Table 19: Main function type examples

If the setting “OpFnType” is set to “ON” then the set value for function type will be used for all event blocks and the disturbance recorder, other-wise the setting on each event block and the disturbance recorder will de-cide the function type of that function block.

Value Function type according to IEC 60870-5-103

128 Distance protection

160 Overcurrent protection

192 Line differential protection

Page 107: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

94

Verifying the communication Chapter 11Establishing connection and

verifying the

2 Verifying the communicationTo verify that the rear communication with the SMS/SCS system is working, there are some dif-ferent methods. Choose one of the following.

2.1 Verifying SPA communication

Procedure1. Use a SPA-emulator and send “RF” to the terminal. The answer from

the terminal should be “REx500 25”.

2. Generate one binary event by activating a function which is config-ured to an event block where the used input is set to generate events on SPA. The configuration must be made with the CAP5xx software. Verify that the event is presented in the SMS/SCS system.

During the following tests of the different functions in the terminal, verify that the events and indications in the SMS/SCS system are as expected.

2.2 Verifying IEC communicationTo verify that the IEC communication with the IEC master system is working, there are some different methods. Choose one of the following.

Procedure1. Check that the master system time-out for response from the termi-

nal, for example after a setting change, is > 40 seconds.

2. Use a protocol analyzer and record the communication between the terminal and the IEC master. Check in the protocol analyzer’s log that the terminal answers the master messages.

3. Generate one binary event by activating a function which is config-ured to an event block where the used input is set to generate events on IEC. The configuration must be made with the CAP5xx software. Verify that the event is presented in the IEC master system.

During the following tests of the different functions in the terminal, verify that the events and indications in the IEC master system are as expected.

Page 108: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

95

Optical budget calculation for serial communication with SPA/IEC

Chapter 11Establishing connection and

verifying theSPA/IEC-communication

3 Optical budget calculation for serial communication with SPA/IECTable 20: Example

Distance 1 km

Glass

Distance 25 m

Plastic

Maximum attenuation for REx 5xx - 11 dB - 7 dB

4 dB/km multi mode: 820 nm - 62.5/125 um 4 dB -

0.16 dB/m plastic: 620 nm - 1mm - 4 dB

Margins for installation, aging etc. 5 dB 1 dB

Losses in connection box, two contacts (0.7 dB/contact) 1.4 dB -

Losses in connection box, two contacts (1 dB/contact) - 2 dB

Margin for repair splices (0.5 dB/splice) 0.5 dB -

Maximum total attenuation 11 dB 7 dB

Page 109: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

96

Optical budget calculation for serial communication with SPA/IEC

Chapter 11Establishing connection and

verifying the

Page 110: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

97

About this chapter Chapter 12Establishing connection and

verifying the LON communication

Chapter 12 Establishing connection and verifying the LON communication

About this chapterThis chapter referes to another document.

Page 111: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

98

Reference Chapter 12Establishing connection and

verifying the LON communication

1 ReferenceWe refere to document: LNT 505 Operator’s Manual 1MRS751706-MUM, Issued: 31.10.99, Program rev: 1.1.1 Doc. version: B.

1.1 Verification of the optical budget

1.1.1 Optical budget calculation for serial communication with LON Table 21: Example

Distance 1 km

Glass

Distance 20 m

Plastic

Maximum attenuation for REx 5xx -11 dB - 7 dB

4 dB/km multi mode: 820 nm - 62.5/125 um 4 dB -

0.2 dB/m plastic: 620 nm - 1mm - 4 dB

Margins for installation, aging etc. 5 dB 1 dB

Losses in connection box, two contacts (0.7 dB/contact) 1.4 dB -

Losses in connection box, two contacts (1dB/contact) - 2 dB

Margin for repair splices (0.5 dB/splice) 0.5 dB -

Maximum total attenuation 11 dB 7 dB

Page 112: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

99

About this chapter Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Chapter 13 Verifying settings by secondary injection

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to verify that the protection functions operates correctly according to the settings. Only the tested function should be in operation.

Page 113: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

100

Overview Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

1 OverviewRequired tools for testing of a terminal:

• Calculated settings• Configuration diagram• Terminal diagram• Technical reference manual• Three-phase test equipment

The terminal has to be set and configured before the testing can start.

The terminal diagram, available in the Technical reference manual, is a general diagram for the terminal. But note that the same diagram is not always applicable for each specific delivery (es-pecially for the configuration of all the binary inputs and outputs). It is for this reason necessary to check before testing that the available terminal diagram corresponds to the terminal.

The Technical reference manual contains application and functionality summaries, function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function.

The test equipment should be able to provide a three-phase supply of voltages and currents. The magnitude of voltage and current as well as the phase angle between voltage and current must be variable. The voltages and currents from the test equipment must be obtained from the same source and they must have a very small harmonic contents. If the test equipment cannot indicate the phase angle, a separate phase-angle meter is necessary.

Prepare the terminal for test before testing a particular function. Consider the logic diagram of the tested protection function when performing the test. All included functions in the terminal are tested according to the corresponding test instructions in this chapter. The functions can be tested in any order according to user preferences and the test instructions are therefor presented in alphabetical order. Only the functions that are used (Operation is set to On) should be tested.

The response from a test can be viewed in different ways:

• Binary outputs signals• Service values in the local HMI (logical signal or phasors)• A PC with CAP (configuration software) in debug mode

All used setting groups should be tested.

Note! This terminal is designed for a maximum continuous current of four times the rated current.

Page 114: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

101

Overview Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Note!Please observe the measuring accuracy of the terminal, the test equipment and the angular ac-curacy for both of them.

Note!Please consider the configured logic from the function block to the output contacts when mea-suring the operate time.

Page 115: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

102

Preparing for test Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2 Preparing for test

2.1 OverviewThis section describes how to prepare the terminal in order to verify settings.

The preparation starts with making the connections to the test switch if included. This means connecting the test equipment according to a valid terminal diagram for the specific REx 5xx terminal. The terminal can then be set in test mode in order to facilitate the test of individual functions and prevent unwanted operation from functions other than the tested. The test switch should then be connected to the terminal. The user could also verify the connection and that the analog inputs signals are measured correctly by injecting currents and voltages as required by the specific REx 5xx terminal. The tested function should then be released. The disturbance re-port settings could be checked to ensure that correct indications are given. The user could also identify the function to test in the technical reference manual to retrieve signals and parameters names etc.

2.2 Preparing the connection to the test equipmentThe REx 5xx terminal can be equipped with a test switch of type RTXP 24. The test switch and its associated test plug handle (RTXH 24) are a part of the COMBITEST system which gives a secure and convenient testing of the terminal.

When the test-plug handle is inserted into the test switch, preparations for testing are automati-cally carried out in the proper sequence (i.e. blocking of tripping circuits, short circuiting of CT’s, opening of voltage circuits, making relay terminals available for secondary injection). Terminals 1 and 12 of the test switch are not disconnected as they are used for dc supply of the protection terminal.

The test-plug handle leads may be connected to any type of test equipment or instrument. When a number of protection terminals of the same type are tested, the test-plug handle need be moved only from the test switch of one protection terminal to the test switch of the other, without alter-ing previously made connections.

To prevent unwanted tripping when the handle is withdrawn, latches on the handle secure it in the half withdrawn position. In this position, all voltages and currents are restored to the protec-tion terminal and any reenergizing transients are given a chance to decay before the trip circuits are restored. When the latches are released, the handle can be completely withdrawn form the test switch, restoring the trip circuits to the protection terminal.

If a test switch is not used necessary actions need to be taken according to circuit diagram.

Page 116: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

103

Preparing for test Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2.3 Setting the terminal in test modeThe terminal can be set in test mode before test. This means that all included functions can be blocked or released as decided during the test. In this way, it is possible to test slower back-up measuring functions without the interference of faster measuring functions. Test mode is indi-cated when the yellow LED is flashing.

Procedure1. Browse to the ‘Operation’ menu and press ‘E’.

The Operation menu is located in the local HMI under:

Test/TestMode/Operation

2. Choose ‘On’ and press ‘E’.

3. Press ‘C’ twice to exit the menu.

The dialog ‘Save testGroup?’ appears.

4. Choose ‘Yes’ and leave the menu.

The window repeatedly displays ‘Busy’ and after that the yellow LED starts flashing which indicates that the terminal is in test mode.

2.4 Connecting test equipment to the terminalBefore testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid terminal diagram for each specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to the correct connection of the input and output current terminals, and to the connection of the residual current. Check that the input and output logical signals in the logic diagram for the tested function are configured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the tested terminal.

Warning!Never disconnect a secondary connection of current transformer circuit without short-circuiting the transformer's secondary winding. Operating a current transformer with the secondary wind-ing open will cause a massive potential build-up that may damage the transformer and may cause injuries to humans.

Page 117: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

104

Preparing for test Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 27: Connection of the test set to the REx 5xx terminal.

2.5 Verifying the connection and the analog inputsThe user must verify that the connection and that the analog signals are measured correctly.

Procedure1. Compare the injected value with the measured value.

The phasor menu is located in the local-HMI under:

ServiceReport/Phasors/Primary and Secondary

Consider set ratio factors for CT’s and VT’s.

2. Compare the frequency reading with the set frequency and the direc-tion of the power with the injected power.

The frequency and active power are located in the local-HMI under:

ServiceReport/ServiceValues

3. Inject a unsymmetrical three-phase current and voltage at rated val-ue in two phases.

4. Compare the injected value with the measured value.

The phasor menu is located in the local-HMI under:

IL1IL2IL3NI

UL1UL2UL3UN

IL1IL2IL3

UL1

IN (I4,I5)

TRIP L1TRIP L2TRIP L3

REL

AY T

EST

SET

REx

5xx

en01000162.vsd

UL2UL3UNUN (U4,U5)

Page 118: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

105

Preparing for test Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

ServiceReport/Phasors/Primary and Secondary

2.6 Releasing the function(s) to be testedThe user can release the function(s) to be tested. This is done in order to set only the tested func-tion(s) in operation and prevent other functions from operating. The user can release the tested function(s) by setting the corresponding parameter under BlockFunctions to NO in the local HMI. When testing a function in this blocking feature, remember that not only the actual func-tion must be activated, but the whole sequence of interconnected functions (from measuring in-puts to binary output contacts), including logic and so on. Before starting a new test mode session the user should scroll through every function to ensure that only the function to be tested (and the interconnected ones) are set to NO. A function is also blocked if the BLOCK input sig-nal on the corresponding function block is active, which depends on the configuration. The user should therefore ensure that the logical status of the BLOCK input signal is equal to 0 for the tested function. The user could also individually block event blocks to ensure that no events are reported to remote station during the test.

Procedure1. Browse to the ‘BlockFunctions’ menu.

The BlockFunctions menu is located in the local HMI under:

Test/TestMode/BlockFunctions

2. Browse to the function that should be released.

Use the left and right arrow buttons. Press ‘E’ when the desired function has been found.

3. Select ‘No’.

4. Press ‘C’ twice to leave the menu.

The ‘Save TestGroup?’ dialog appears.

5. Choose ‘Yes’ leave the menu.

2.7 Checking the disturbance report settingsThe terminal must be set in testmode (Operation=ON) to activate the disturbance report settings.

The user can select how the disturbances are indicated on the local HMI during the test. The user can for example select if the disturbance summary should be stored, scrolled on the local HMI or if LED information should be stored. Scroll to the disturbance report settings which are locat-ed in the local HMI under:

Note!The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signal remains active. All functions that where blocked or released from previous test mode session are still valid when a new test mode session is entered.

Page 119: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

106

Preparing for test Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Test/TestMode/DisturbReport

Table 22: Disturbance report settings

2.8 Identifying the function to test in the technical reference manualThe user can use the technical reference manual (TRM) to identify function blocks, logic dia-grams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data.

Operation DisturbSum-mary

Then the results are...

Off Off • Disturbances are not stored.• LED information is not displayed on the HMI and not stored.• No disturbance summary is scrolled on the HMI.

Off On • Disturbances are not stored.• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are displayed on the local

HMI but not stored in the terminal.• Disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the

two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared.• The information is not stored in the terminal.

On On or Off • The disturbance report works as in normal mode.• Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a

front-connected PC, or SMS.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

• The disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared.

• All disturbance data that is stored during test mode remains in the ter-minal when changing back to normal mode.

Page 120: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

107

Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

3 Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section “Preparing for test” in this chapter.

The SOTF is checked by secondary injection tests together with the distance or overcurrent pro-tection function and with the DLD function. The switch-onto-fault function is activated either by the external input SOTF-BC, or by the internal DLD function. The latter is done by a prefault condition with the phase voltages and currents at zero.A reverse three-phase fault with zero im-pedance and a three-phase fault with an impedance corresponding to the whole line is applied. For this fault an instantaneous trip shall be achieved together with the indication SOTF-TRIP.

3.1 External activation of SOTF function

Procedure1. Activate the switch-onto-fault (SOTF-BC) input.

During normal operating conditions, the SOTF-BC input is de-energised.

2. Apply a three phase fault condition corresponding to a fault at ap-proximately 45% of the line or with an impedance at 50% of used zone setting and current greater than 30% of Ir.

3. Check that the correct trip outputs, external signals and indication are obtained.

3.2 Automatic initiation of SOTF

Procedure1. Deactivate the switch-onto-fault (SOTF-BC) input.

2. Set current and voltage inputs to 0 for at least 1 second.

3. Apply a three phase fault condition corresponding to a fault at ap-proximately 45% of the line or with an impedance at 50% of used zone setting and current greater than 30% of Ir.

4. Check that the correct trip outputs, external signals and indication are obtained.

3.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 121: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

108

Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4 Autorecloser (AR)The test can be divided into to parts; one to verify the internal logic and one to verify the co-op-eration with the protection system. This section deals with the first test.

Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The test is performed together with protection and trip functions. Figure 28 illustrates a recom-mended testing scenario, where the circuit breaker is simulated by an external bistable relay (BR), for example an RXMVB2 or an RXMVD. The following switches are needed:

• Switch close (SC)• Switch trip (ST)• Switch ready (SRY).

SC and ST can be push-buttons with spring return. If no bistable relay is available, replace it with two self-reset auxiliary relays and use self-holding connection.

Use a secondary injection relay test set to operate the protection function. It is possible to use the BR to control the injected analogue quantities so that the fault only appears when the BR is picked up—simulating a closed breaker position.

To make the arrangement more elaborate, include the simulation of the operation gear condition, AR01-CBREADY, for the sequences Close-Open (CO) and Open-Close-Open (OCO).

The AR01-CBREADY condition at the CO sequence type is usually low for a recharging time of 5-10 s after a closing operation. Then it is high. The example in figure 28 shows that it is sim-ulated with SRY, a manual switch.

Page 122: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

109

Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 28: Simulating breaker operation with two auxiliary relays.

4.1 Preparing

1. Check the settings of the autorecloser (AR) function.

The operation can be set at Stand-by (Off) in HMI tree:

Settings/Functions/Group n/AutoRecloser/AutoRecloser n

If any timer setting is changed so as to speed-up or facilitate the testing, they must be set to normal after the testing. A verification test has to be done afterwards.

2. Check that the functional input signal SYNC is set to TRUE if the in-ternal or external synchrocheck is not used.

3. Read and note the reclosing operate counters from the HMI tree:

Terminal

AR01 - CLOSE CB

Trip

AR01 - CB CLOSE

AR01 - CB READY

BR

SC

ST

SRY

To testset

+ -en02000446.vsd

Page 123: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

110

Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

ServiceReport/Functions/AutoRecloser/AutoRecloser n/Counters

4. Do the testing arrangements outlined above, for example, as in fig-ure 28.

5. The AR01-CBCLOSED breaker position, the commands Trip and Closing, AR01-CLOSECB, and other signals should preferably be ar-ranged for event recording provided with time measurements.

Otherwise, a separate timer or recorder can be used to check the AR open time and other timers.

4.2 Checking the AR functionality

1. Ensure that the voltage inputs to Synchro-check, when applied, give accepted conditions at open breaker (BR).

They can, for example, be Live busbar and Dead line.

2. Set the operation at On.

3. Make a BR pickup by a closing pulse, the SC-pulse.

4. Close SRY, Breaker ready and leave it closed.

5. Inject AC quantities to give a trip and start AR in phase L1.

Observe or record the BR operation. The BR relay should trip and re-close. After the closing operation, the SRY switch could be opened for about 5 s and then closed.

The AR open time and the operating sequence should be checked, for ex-ample, in the event recording.

Check the operate indications and the operate counters.

Should the operation not be as expected, the reason must be investigated. It could be due to an AR Off state or wrong program selection, or not ac-cepted synchro-check conditions.

6. Repeat procedure 5 for phase L2 and L3, two-phase and three-phase trips, transient, and permanent fault.

The signal sequence diagrams in the Technical reference manual can be of guidance for the checking.

4.3 Checking the reclosing conditionThe number of cases can be varied according to the application. Examples of selection cases are:

Page 124: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

111

Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4.3.1 Checking the Inhibit signal

1. Check that the function is operative and that the breaker conditions are okay.

2. Apply an AR01-INHIBIT input signal and start the reclosing function.

3. Check that there is no reclosing.

4.3.2 Checking the closing onto a fault

1. Set the breaker simulating relay, BR, in position open.

2. Then close it with the SC switch and start the AR within one second.

3. Check that there is no reclosing.

4.3.3 Checking the breaker not ready

1. Close the BR breaker relay and see that everything except for AR01-CBREADY is in normal condition (SRY is open).

2. Start the AR function.

3. Check that there is no reclosing.

4.3.4 Checking the synchro-check condition (for three-phase reclosing cycle)

1. Check the function at non-acceptable voltage conditions.

2. Wait for the time out, >5 s.

3. Check that there is no reclosing.

4.3.5 Checking the operation Stand-by and Off

1. Check that no reclosing can occur with the function in Off state.

2. Check the operation in stand-by mode.

Depending on the program selection and the selected fault types that start and inhibit reclosing, a check of no unwanted reclosing can be made. For example, if only single-phase reclosing is selected, a test can verify that there is no reclosing after two-phase and three-phase trips.

Page 125: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

112

Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4.4 Testing the multi-breaker arrangementIf a multi-breaker arrangement is used for the application and priorities are given for the master (high) and slave (low) terminals, test that correct operation takes place and that correct signals are issued. The signals WFMASTER, UNSUC, WAIT and INHIBIT should be involved.

4.5 Completing the testAfter the test, restore the equipment to normal or desired state. Especially check these items:

1. Check and record the counter contents (Reset if it is the user’s pref-erence).

The counters menu is located in the local HMI under:

ServiceReport/Functions/AutoRecloser/AutoRecloser n/Counters/Clear Counters

2. Reset the setting parameters as required.

3. Disconnect the test switch or disconnected links of connection ter-minals.

4. Reset indications and events.

The ClearDistRep menu is located in the local HMI under:

DisturbReport/ClearDistRep

Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 126: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

113

Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5 Breaker failure protection (BFP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Consider to release used start criteria. The trip is a pulse with a length of 150 ms. Fault condition: the current in a phase must exceed the set IP> as latest within the set t1 time after the START/STLN input is activated.

To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:

• One for a phase-to-earth fault

The breaker-failure protection should be tested in co-operation with some other functions, and in particular with the protection and trip functions or via external start.

5.1 Verifying the settings

Procedure1. Apply the fault condition with a current below set IP>.

2. Repeat the fault condition and increase the current in step until trip appears.

3. Compare the result with the set IP>.

Note: If no I> check is set only back-up trip operate at set IP>.

5.2 Verifying the retrip settingChoose one of the test cases in 5.2 "Verifying the retrip setting" according to valid setting.

5.2.1 Checking the retrip function with retrip set to off

Procedure1. Set RetripType = Retrip Off.

2. Apply the fault condition with current over the set value.

3. Verify that retrip in phase L1 is not achieved.

5.2.2 Checking the retrip function with current check

Procedure1. Set RetripType = I> check.

2. Apply the fault condition with current over the set value.

3. Verify that retrip is achieved after t1 that back-up trip is achieved af-ter t2.

Page 127: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

114

Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5.2.3 Checking the retrip function without current check

Procedure1. Set RetripType = No I> check.

2. Apply the fault condition with current below the set value.

3. Verify that retrip is achieved after t1.

4. Apply the fault condition with current over the set value.

5. Verify that back-up trip is achieved after t2.

5.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 128: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

115

Broken conductor check (BRC) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

6 Broken conductor check (BRC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

6.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values

Procedure1. Check that the input logical signal BRC-BLOCK is logical zero and

note on the local HMI that the BRC-TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.

Values of the logical signals belonging to the broken conductor check function are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/BrokenConduct/FuncOutputs

2. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to about 110% of the setting (IP>) operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

3. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the BRC protection.

Use the BRC--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

4. Compare the measured time with the set value t.

5. Activate the BRC--BLOCK binary input.

6. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value t.

No BRC--TRIP signal should appear.

7. Switch off the fault current.

8. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in same phase to about 90% of the setting operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

9. Switch on the fault current and wait longer than the set value t.

No BRC--TRIP signal should appear.

10. Switch off the fault current.

11. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 129: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

116

Communication channel test logic (CCHT) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

7 Communication channel test logic (CCHT)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

7.1 Testing the logic

1. Set all the timers according to the recommendations.

2. Activate the CCHT--CR binary input.

3. Measure the CCHT--CS binary output.

A pulse should appear “tCS”.

4. Activate the CCHT--START and wait longer than “tWait”.

The CCHT--ALARM should appear.

5. Activate the CCHT--RESET to reset the alarm.

6. When the communication channel is connected, activate the CCHT--START and wait for the signal to come back.

The CCHT--CHOK should appear.

7. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 130: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

117

Current circuit supervision (CTSU) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

8 Current circuit supervision (CTSU)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The current circuit supervision function is conveniently tested with the same 3-phase test set as used when testing the measuring functions in the REx 5xx.

Procedure1. Check the input circuits and the operate value of the IMinOp current

level detector by injecting current, one phase at a time.

2. Check the phase current blocking function for all three phases by in-jecting current, one phase at a time.

The output signals shall reset with a delay of 1 s when the current exceeds 1.5·I1b.

3. Inject a current 0.90·I1b to phase L1 and a current 0.15·I1b to the ref-erence current input (I5).

4. Decrease slowly the current to the reference current input and check that blocking is obtained when the current is about 0.10·I1b.

5. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 131: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

118

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

9 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The testing instructions are related to each separate phase, when phase segregated scheme com-munication logic ZC1P is used. Only one type of fault is necessary, when three-phase scheme communication logic ZCOM is used.

The current reversal logic and the week end infeed functions are tested during the secondary in-jection test of the impedance or overcurrent protection zones together with the scheme commu-nication logic for the distance protection function (ZCOM or ZC1P).

9.1 Current reversal logicIt is possible to check the delay of the ZCOM-CS (ZC1P-CSLn) carrier send signal with tDelay by changing from a reverse to a forward fault.

By continuously activating the ZCOM-CR (ZC1P-CRLn) input and changing from a reverse to a forward fault, the delay tDelay can be checked.

9.1.1 Checking of current reversal

Procedure1. Activate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CRLn) signal.

2. Set the healthy condition to an impedance at 50% of the reach of the reverse zone connected to ZCAL-IRVLn.

3. After the start condition is obtained for reverse zone, apply a fault at 50% of the reach of the forward zone connected to ZCAL-WEIBLKLn.

4. Check that correct trip outputs and external signals are obtained for the type of fault generated.

The operation time should be about the tDelay setting longer than the car-rier accelerated trip (ZCOM-TRIP or ZC1P-TRLn) previously recorded for permissive scheme communication.

Note!The reverse zone timer must not operate before the forward zone fault is applied. The user might need to block the reverse zone timer during testing of current reversal.

Note!The forward zone timer must be set longer than 90 ms.

Page 132: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

119

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Repeat the procedure for other phases.

Only when ZC1P is used.

6. Restore the forward and reverse zone timer to its original setting.

9.2 Weak end infeed logic

9.2.1 WEI logic at permissive schemes

Procedure1. Check the blocking of the echo with the injection of a ZCOM-CR or

ZC1P-CRLn signal >40 ms after a reverse fault is applied.

2. Measure the duration of the echoed signal by applying a ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn carrier receive signal.

3. Check the trip functions and the voltage level for trip by reducing a phase voltage and applying a ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn carrier re-ceive signal.

4. Repeat the procedure for other phases.

Only when ZC1P is used.

9.2.2 Testing conditionsOnly one type of fault is sufficient, with ZCOM function. Apply three faults (one in each phase), when ZC1P function is used. For phase L1-N fault, set these parameters:

Table 23:

Change all settings cyclically for other faults (L2-N and L3-N).

Weak end infeed set for trip1. Apply input signals according table 23.

2. Activate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn) signal of the terminal.

3. After the relay has operated, turn off the input signals.

4. Check that trip, carrier-send signal, and indication are obtained.

5. Repeat the procedure for other phases.

Only when ZC1P is used.

Phase I (Amps) Phase-angle (Deg)

V (Volts) Phase-angle (Deg)

L1 0 0 Set less than UPN< 0

L2 0 240 63 240

L3 0 120 63 120

Page 133: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

120

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Weak end infeed set for echo1. Apply input signals according table 23.

2. Activate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR or ZC1P-CRLn) signal of the terminal.

3. After the relay has operated turn off the input signals.

4. Check that the carrier send signal is obtained.

5. Repeat the procedure for other phases.

Only when ZC1P is used.

9.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 134: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

121

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

10 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

First, test the time delayed residual overcurrent protection according to the corresponding in-struction. Then continue with the instructions below.

Logical signals for current reversal and WEI logic for residual overcurrent protection are avail-able under menu tree:

Service Report/Functions/EarthFault/ComlRevWeiEF/FuncOutputs

10.1 Testing the current reversal logic

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage 3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle be-

tween voltage and current to 155°, the current leading the voltage.

2. Inject current (155° leading the voltage) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current (IN>Dir).

3. Check that the EFCA-IRVL output is activated after the set time (tPickUp).

4. Abruptly reverse the current to 65° lagging the voltage, to operate the forward directional element.

5. Check that the EFCA-IRVL output still is activated after the reversal with a time delay that complies with the setting (tDelay).

6. Switch off the polarising voltage and the current.

10.2 Testing the weak-end-infeed logic

10.2.1 If setting parameter WEI=Echo

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage 3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle be-

tween voltage and current to 155°, the current leading the voltage.

2. Inject current (155° leading the voltage) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current (IN>Dir).

3. Activate the EFCA-CRL binary input.

No EFCA-ECHO and EFC--CS should appear.

Page 135: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

122

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4. Abruptly reverse the current to 65° lagging the voltage, to operate the forward directional element.

No EFCA-ECHO and EFC--CS should appear.

5. Switch off the current and check that the EFCA-ECHO and EFC--CS appears on the corresponding binary output or on the local HMI unit, about 200 ms after resetting the directional element.

6. Switch off the EFCA-CRL binary input.

7. Activate the EFCA-BLOCK binary input.

8. Activate the EFCA-CRL binary input.

No EFCA--ECHO and EFC--CS should appear.

9. Switch off the polarising voltage and reset the EFCA-BLOCK and EF-CA-CRL binary input.

10.2.2 If setting WEI=Trip

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage 3U0 to about 90% of the setting (Ugr) op-

erating voltage.

2. Activate the EFCA-CRL binary input.

No EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI outputs should appear.

3. Increase the injected voltage to about 110% of the setting (Ugr) op-erating voltage.

4. Activate the EFCA-CRL binary input.

5. Check that the EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI appears on the corresponding binary output or on the local HMI unit.

6. Reset the EFCA-CRL binary input.

7. Activate the EFCA-BLOCK binary input.

8. Activate the EFCA-CRL binary input.

No EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI outputs should appear.

9. Reset the EFCA-CRL and EFCA-BLOCK binary input.

10. Inject the polarising voltage 3U0 to about 110% of the setting (Ugr) and the phase angle between voltage and current to 155°, the current leading the voltage.

11. Inject current (155° leading the voltage) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current (IN>Dir).

12. Activate the EFCA-CRL binary input.

No EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI should appear.

Page 136: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

123

Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13. Abruptly reverse the current to 65° lagging the voltage, to operate the forward directional element.

No EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI should appear.

14. Switch off the current and check that the EFCA-ECHO, EFC--CS and EFCA-TRWEI appears on the corresponding binary output or on the local HMI unit, about 200 ms after resetting the directional element.

15. Switch off the polarising voltage and reset the EFCA-CRL binary in-put.

10.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 137: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

124

Dead line detection (DLD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

11 Dead line detection (DLD)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Measure the set operate values for currents and voltages. Observe the functional output signals on the local HMI under the menu:

ServiceReport/Functions/DeadLineDet/FuncOutputs

It is also possible to configure the output signals to the binary outputs for testing purposes.

Procedure1. Set the currents and voltages in phases L1, L2, and L3 to their rated

values.

2. Decrease the current in phase L1 slowly, until the DLD--STIL1 signal changes to a logical 1.

Observe the functional output signal DLD--STIL1 on the HMI.

3. Record the value and compare it with the set value IP<.

4. Increase the current to its original value.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for phases L2 (signal DLD--STIL2) and L3 (signal DLD--STIL3).

6. Decrease the voltage in phase L1 slowly, until the DLD--STUL1 sig-nal changes to a logical 1.

Observe the functional output signal DLD--STUL1 on the HMI.

7. Record the value and compare it with the set value UP<.

8. Increase the voltage to its original value.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for phases L2 (signal DLD--STUL2) and L3 (signal DLD--STUL3).

10. Make sure that all signals are reconfigured to their initial state.

11. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 138: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

125

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

12 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Normally, the test of the earth-fault overcurrent protection is made in conjunction with the test-ing of the distance protection functions, using the same multiphase test-set. Observe that the po-larising voltage is equal to -3Uo.

12.1 Checking the operate values of the current measuring elements

Procedure1. Set the logical input signals to logical 0 and note on the local HMI

that the TEF--TRIP and the TEF--TRSOTF signal is not activated (= logical 0).

Values of the logical signals belonging to the time delayed residual over-current protection are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/EarthFault/TimeDelayEF

2. Set the polarising voltage to 2% of Ub and the phase angle between voltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage.

3. Check that the operate current of the forward directional element is equal to the IN> Dir setting.

The IN> Dir function activates the TEF--STFW output.

4. Check with angles ϕ = 20° and 110° that the measuring element op-erates when 3I0 cos (65° - ϕ) >= IN> Dir.

5. Reverse the polarising voltage (ϕ = 180° + 65° = 245°) and check that the operate current of the reverse directional element is 0.6 · IN> Dir.

The function activates the TEF--STRV output.

Page 139: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

126

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 29: Measuring characteristic of the directional element.

6. To activate the directional function, set Direction = Directional.

7. Set the polarising voltage to 2% of Ub and the phase angle between voltage and current to 65°.

8. Check the operate current of the IMin function.

The function activates the TEF--START output.

9. When independent time delay (definite) is selected, check the oper-ate time of the t1 timer by injecting a current two times the set IMin operate value.

When inverse time delay is selected, check the operate time at three points of the inverse characteristic. The formulas for operate time for dif-ferent types of inverse time delay curves are shown in table 24.

IN>Dir

IN Operation

Upol = -3U0

99000052.vsd

65°

ϕ

Page 140: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

127

Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Table 24: Operate time formulas

Also check the tMin (minimum operate time) and IMin (minimum oper-ate current) functions.

10. Activate the TEF--BC input to check the function of the switch-on-to-fault logic.

11. Check that the TEF--TRSOTF output is activated with a 300 ms time delay when injecting a current two times the set IMin operate value in forward direction.

12. Set the phase angle of the polarising voltage to ϕ =245° and check that the directional current function and the switch-onto-fault logic gives no operation when the current is in the reverse direction.

13. Connect the rated DC voltage to the TEF--BLOCK configured binary input and switch on the fault current.

No TEF--TRIP nor TEF--START signal should appear.

14. Switch off the fault current.

15. Connect the rated DC voltage to the TEF--BLKTR configured binary input and switch on the fault current.

No TEF--TRIP nor TEF--TRSOTF should appear. But the output TEF--START shall be activated.

16. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Characteristics Operate time (s)

Normal inverse(Equation 1)

Very inverse(Equation 2)

Extremely inverse(Equation 3)

Logarithmic inverse(Equation 4)

Where:

I is a multiple of set current 3I0>

k is a time multiplying factor, settable in the range of 0.05 to 1.10

t 0.14I0.02 1–-------------------- k⋅=

t 13.5I 1–----------- k⋅=

t 80I2 1–------------- k⋅=

t 5.8 1.35 Iln⋅( )–=

Page 141: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

128

Distance protection (ZMn) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13 Distance protection (ZMn)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter. Consider to release Zone 1, the PHS and the TR0n. If the autorecloser is not re-leased and in service, trip will always be three phase.

Measure operating characteristics during constant current conditions. Keep the measured current as close as possible to its rated value or lower. But ensure that it is higher than 30% of the rated current.

Ensure that the maximum continuous current of a terminal does not exceed four times its rated value, if the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage condi-tions.

To verify the settings for the operating points according to figure 30, 31 or 32 and (table 25 and 26) the following fault types should be tested:

• One phase-to-phase fault (when the Ph-Ph measurement included in terminal)• One phase-to-earth fault (when the Ph-E measurement included in terminal)

The shape of the operating characteristic depends on the values of the setting parameters.

Figure 30: Test points for the distance protection (ZMn), operating characteristic case 1

en01000086.vsd

R

P2

P3

P1

P5

P4

80%

P6

P7

jX

Page 142: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

129

Distance protection (ZMn) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 31: Test points for the distance protection (ZMn), operating characteristic case 2

Figure 32: Test points for the distance protection (ZMn), operating characteristic case 3

en01000173.vsd

R

P2

P3

P1

P5

P4

80%

P6

P7

jX

en01000174.vsd

R

P2

P3

P1

P5

P4

80%

P6

P7

jX

Page 143: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

130

Distance protection (ZMn) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Table 25: Test points for phase-to-phase loops L1-L2 (Ohm/Loop)

Table 26: Test points for phase-to-earth L3-E (Ohm/Loop)

Test point Reach Set value According to figure

P1 X 2 · X1PPset 30, 31 and 32

R 2 · R1PPset

P2 X 0.8 · X1PPset · 2 30, 31 and 32

R 0.8 · R1PPset · 2 + RFPPset

P3 X 0 30, 31 and 32

R RFPPset

P4 X 0.5 · 2 · X1PPset 30, 31 and 32

R 0.5 · 2 · R1PPset

P5 X P2X 30

arg ArgNegResset (for directional zone)

P5 X P2X 31 and 32

R P2R - 2·RFPPset

P6 arg ArgDirset (for directional zone) 30, 31 and 32

P7 X 0.1·P1X 30, 31 and 32

arg ArgNegResset (for directional zone)

Test point Reach Set value According to figure

P1 X 30, 31 and 32

R

P2 X 30, 31 and 32

R

P3 X 0 30, 31 and 32

R RFPEset

P4 X 30, 31 and 32

R

P5 X P2X 30

arg ArgNegResset (for directional zone)

2 X1PEset X0PEset+⋅3

--------------------------------------------------- -------

2 R1PEset R0PEset+⋅3

---------------------------------------------------- -----

0.82 X1PEset X0PEset+⋅

3--------------------------------------------⋅ ---------- --

0.82 R1PEset R 0PEset+⋅

3---------------------------------------- ------⋅ RFPEset+----------- ----- ---

0.52 X1PEset X0PEset+⋅

3--------------------------------------------⋅ ---------- --

0.52 R1PEset R 0PEset+⋅

3---------------------------------------- ------⋅ ----------- ----- ---

Page 144: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

131

Distance protection (ZMn) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

Procedure1. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

2. Apply the fault condition and slowly decrease the measured imped-ance to find the operating value for the phase-to-phase loop for zone 1 according to test point P1 in table table 25. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.

3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating value for test point P2, P3 in table table 25 and the operating value for the phase-to-earth loop ac-cording to test point P1, P2, P3 in table table 26.

4. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

5. Apply the fault condition and slowly increase the measured resis-tance to find the operating value for test point P5 in table 25. Com-pare the result of the measurement with the set value.

6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to find the operating value for test point P7 in ta-ble tabel 25 and P5 and P7 in table 26.

7. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

8. Apply the fault condition and slowly increase the measured reac-tance to find the operating value for test point P6 in table 25. Com-pare the result of the measurement with the set value.

9. Repeat steps 7 to 8 to find the operating value for test point P6 in ta-ble 26.

10. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all other used measuring zones.

Observe that the zone that are not tested has to be blocked and the zone that is tested has to be released.

P5 X P2X 31 and 32

R P2R - 2·RFPEset

P6 arg ArgDirset (for directional zone) 30, 31 and 32

P7 X 0.1·P1X 30, 31 and 32

arg ArgNegResset (for directional zone)

Test point Reach Set value According to figure

Page 145: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

132

Distance protection (ZMn) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13.2 Measuring the operate time of distance protection zones

Procedure1. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

2. Apply the fault condition to find the operating time for the phase-to-phase loop according to test point P4 in table table 25 for zone 1. Compare the result of the measurement with the setting t1PP.

3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operating time for the phase-to-earth loop according to test point P4 in table 26. Compare the result of the measurement with the setting t1PE.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to find the operating time for all other used mea-suring zones.

Observe that the zone that are not tested has to be blocked and the zone that is tested has to be released.

13.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Note!Test points 6 and 7 are intended to test the directional lines of impedance protection. Since di-rectionality is a common function for all 5 measuring zones, in order to test the accuracy of di-rectionality (directional angles), it is enough to test points 6 and 7 one time only in forward direction (the largest reverse zone can be used to facilitate the test). Directional functionality (trip inside, no-trip outside) should always be carried for all ZM zones set with directionality (forward or reverse).

Page 146: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

133

Disturbance recorder (DR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

14 Disturbance recorder (DR)Evaluation of the results from the disturbance recording function requires access to a worksta-tion either permanently connected to the terminal or temporarily connected to the serial port on the front. The CAP tool software package must be installed in the workstation.

Disturbance upload can be performed by the use of SMS 510, CAP 540 or by any third party tool with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. Disturbance files can be analyzed by any tool reading Comtrade formatted disturbance files including REVAL and WinEve.

It could be useful to have a printer for hard copies. The behavior of the disturbance recording function can be checked when protective functions of the terminal are tested. When the terminal is set to operate in test mode, there is a separate setting for operation of the disturbance report, which also affects the disturbance recorder.

A manual trig can be started any time. This results in a snap-shot of the actual values of all re-corded channels.

Page 147: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

134

Event counter (CN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

15 Event counter (CN)The function can be tested by connecting a binary input to the counter under test and from out-side apply pulses to the counter. The speed of pulses must not exceed 10 per second. Normally the counter will be tested in connection with tests on the function that the counter is connected to, such as trip logic. When configured, test it together with the function which operates it. Trig the function and check that the counter has followed the number of operations.

Page 148: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

135

Event function (EV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

16 Event function (EV)During testing, the terminal can be set in test mode from the PST. The functionality of the event reporting during test mode is set from the PST as follows:

• Use event masks• Report no events• Report all events

In Test Mode, individual event blocks can be blocked from the PST.

Individually event blocks can also be blocked from the local HMI under the menu:

Test/TestMode/BlockEventFunc

Page 149: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

136

Event recorder (ER) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

17 Event recorder (ER)During testing, the event recorder can be switched off if desired. This is found in the SMS or Substation Control System (SCS).

Page 150: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

137

Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

18 Fault locator (FLOC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The distance to fault, as calculated for each fault separately, will automatically be displayed on the local HMI for each fault that also causes the non-delayed tripping operation and has been detected by the built-in, phase-selection function. The FLOC- function will not calculate the dis-tance to the fault if faults are repeated in periods shorter than 10 seconds. The values of the cur-rents and voltages are stored in the terminal memory as new disturbances. Start of the calculation of a distance to fault can always be manually initiated.

Distances to faults for the last 10 recorded disturbances can be found on the local HMI under the menu:

DisturbReport/Disturbances/Disturbance n (n=1-10)/FaultLocator

Table 27: Test settings

18.1 Measuring the operate limit

Procedure1. Set the test point (|Z| fault impedance and ZΦ impedance phase

angle ) for a condition that meets the requirements in table 27.

2. Supply the relay with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

3. Apply a fault condition.

Check that the distance-to-fault value displayed on the HMI complies with the following equations (the error should be less than five percent):

Parameter: Condition:

I Higher than 30% IrHealthy conditions U = 63,5 V, I = 0 A & ZF = 0°

Impedance |Z| Test point

Note:

• Zx ≤ (X0 + 2 · X1)/3For single-phase faults• Zx ≤ X1For three and two phase faults• Zx ≤ (X0 + 2 · X1 XM)/3For single-phase fault with mutual

zero-sequence current

Impedance angle ZΦ Test angle

• ZΦ arctan[(X0 + 2 · X1) / (R0 + 2R1)] For single-phase faults• ZΦ arctan(X1/R1)For two-phase faults

Page 151: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

138

Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

(Equation 5)

in % for two- and three-phase faults

(Equation 6)

in % for single-phase-to-earth faults

(Equation 7)

in % for single-phase-to-earth faults with mutual zero sequence current.

18.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Where:

p = the expected value of a distance to fault in percent

Zx = set test point on the test set

X0 = set zero-sequence reactance of a line

X1 = set positive-sequence reactance of a line

XM = set mutual zero-sequence impedance of a line

pZxX1------- 100⋅=

p3 Z⋅ x

X0 2 X1⋅+----------------------------- 100⋅=

p3 Z⋅ x

X0 2 X1 XM±⋅+--------------------------------------------- 100⋅=

Page 152: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

139

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

19 Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter. Specially check the configuration of input and output logical signals depending on the setting Imeasured and UMeasured.

Check that the input logical signals EF4--BLOCK and E4F--BLKTR are logical zero and note on the local HMI that the EF4--TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0. Logical signals for 4-step residual overcurrent protection are available under menu tree:

Service Report/Functions/EarthFault/4StepEF/FuncOutputs

19.1 Testing the direction measuring element

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage -3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle

between voltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage.

2. Inject current (65° lagging the voltage) in one phase until the EF4--STFW signal appears on the corresponding binary output or on the local HMI unit.

3. Compare the measured operating current with the set value.

4. Activate the EF4--BLOCK binary input.

The EF4--STFW signal should disappear.

5. Switch off the current.

6. Reset the EF4--BLOCK.

7. Reverse the current to 155° leading.

8. Inject the current until the EF4--STRV signal appears on the corre-sponding binary output or on the local HMI.

9. Compare the measured operating current with the set value (0.6·IN>Dir).

10. Switch off the current and the polarising voltage.

19.2 Testing the current step 4.

Note!Before the test, the “operation mode” in current step 1-3 has to be set “OFF”.

Page 153: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

140

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

19.2.1 Testing the setting “NonDirNonRestr” or “Restrained”

Procedure1. Inject current (measured current) in one phase until the signal

EF4--STIN4 appears on the corresponding binary output or on the lo-cal HMI unit.

2. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN4>.

3. Switch off the fault current.

4. If “Restrained” is used, inject current (110% of the setting) with 25% and 40% of 2nd harmonic, to find out the setting of “2ndHarmStab”. Wait longer than the time setting.

No EF4--TRIP signal should appear if the harmonic content is higher then the setting (2ndHarmStab).

5. Switch off the fault current.

6. Continue with section 19.2.4 "Testing the characteristic setting 1=NI, 2=VI, 3=EI or 4=LOG" or 19.2.5 "Testing the characteristic set-ting 0=DEF" depending on the setting.

19.2.2 Testing the setting “ForwRelease” or “ForwRelRestr”

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage -3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle

between voltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage.

2. Inject current (measured current) in one phase until the signal EF4--STIN4 appears on the corresponding binary output or on the lo-cal HMI unit.

3. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN4>.

4. Switch off the fault current.

5. If “Restrained” is used, inject current (110% of the setting) with 25% and 40% of 2nd harmonic, to find out the setting of “2ndHarmStab”. Wait longer than the time setting.

No EF4--TRIP signal should appear if the harmonic content is higher then the setting (2ndHarmStab).

6. Switch off the fault current.

7. Continue with section 19.2.4 "Testing the characteristic setting 1=NI, 2=VI, 3=EI or 4=LOG" or 19.2.5 "Testing the characteristic set-ting 0=DEF" depending on the setting.

Page 154: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

141

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

19.2.3 Testing the setting “RevBlock” or “RevBlRestr”

Procedure1. Inject current (measured current) in one phase until the signal

EF4--STIN4 appears on the corresponding binary output or on the lo-cal HMI unit.

2. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN4>.

3. Switch off the fault current.

4. If “RevBlRestr” is used, inject current (110% of the setting) with 25% and 40% of 2nd harmonic, to find out the setting of “2ndHarmStab”. Wait longer than the time setting.

No EF4--TRIP signal should appear if the harmonic content is higher then the setting (2ndHarmStab).

5. Switch off the fault current.

6. Inject the polarising voltage -3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle between voltage and current to 155°, the current leading the voltage.

7. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the time setting.

No EF4--TRIP should appear.

8. Switch off the fault current.

9. Continue with section 19.2.4 "Testing the characteristic setting 1=NI, 2=VI, 3=EI or 4=LOG" or 19.2.5 "Testing the characteristic set-ting 0=DEF" depending on the setting.

19.2.4 Testing the characteristic setting 1=NI, 2=VI, 3=EI or 4=LOG

1. For NI, Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to about 200% of the setting operating current (IN>Inv), and switch off the current with the switch.

2. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the EF4 protection.

Use the EF4--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

3. Compare the measured time with the set value k.

The measured time should be ten times the “k” setting, except the “LOG” function, which is independent of “k”. The result for “LOG” should be four seconds.

4. Subtract the time setting (t4) from the results if the timer is used.

Page 155: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

142

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Check that the operate time is equal to “tmin” when injecting the ap-propriate current according to the characteristic.

6. Increase the current and check that the operate time remains un-changed.

7. Activate the EF4-BLKTR binary input.

8. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the time setting.

No EF4--TRIP should appear, only start signal “EF4--STIN4”.

9. Switch off the fault current.

10. Reset the EF4-BLKTR input.

11. Repeat step 1 to 10 for settings VI, EI and LOG.

Set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to about 240% of the operating current for VI, 300% for EI and 380% for LOG in step 1.

19.2.5 Testing the characteristic setting 0=DEF

1. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current (IN4>), and switch off the current with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

2. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the EF4 protection.

Use the EF4--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

3. Compare the measured time with the set value t4.

4. Activate the EF4-BLKTR binary input.

5. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value t4.

No EF4--TRIP should appear, only start signal “EF4--STIN4”.

6. Switch off the fault current.

7. Reset the EF4-BLKTR input.

19.3 Testing the “Blocking at parallel transformer” function.Inject the polarising voltage and current according to above.

Page 156: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

143

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Procedure1. Inject current in one phase to about 110% of the setting with 2nd har-

monic (40% higher than the setting “2ndHarmStab”).

No EF4--TRIP should appear.

2. Inject current in same phase to about 110% of the setting (50 Hz).

3. Switch off the fault current with harmonic content.

No EF4--TRIP should appear. (If the setting is 0=Off, EF4--TRIP should appear).

4. Switch off the fault current (50 Hz).

19.4 Testing the current step 1-3Note: Before the test, restore the “operation mode” in current step 1-3.

19.4.1 Testing the setting “NonDirNonRestr” or “Restrained”

Procedure1. Inject current (measured current) in one phase until the signal

EF4--STIN1 appears on the corresponding binary output or on the lo-cal HMI unit.

2. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN1>.

3. Switch off the fault current.

4. If “Restrained” is used, inject current (110% of the setting) with 25% and 40% of 2nd harmonic, to find out the setting of “2ndHarmStab”. Wait longer than the set value t1.

No EF4--TRIP signal should appear if the harmonic content is higher then the setting (2ndHarmStab).

5. Switch off the fault current.

6. Continue with section 19.4.4.

19.4.2 Testing the setting “ForwRelease” or “ForwRelRestr”

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage -3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle

between voltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage.

2. Inject current (measured current) in one phase until the signal EF4--STIN1 appears on the corresponding binary output or on the lo-cal HMI unit.

3. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN1>.

4. Switch off the fault current.

Page 157: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

144

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. If “Restrained” is used, inject current (110% of the setting) with 25% and 40% of 2nd harmonic, to find out the setting of “2ndHarmStab”. Wait longer than the set value t1.

No EF4--TRIP signal should appear if the harmonic content is higher then the setting (2ndHarmStab).

6. Switch off the fault current.

7. Continue with section 19.4.4.

19.4.3 Testing the setting “RevBlock” or “RevBlRestr”

Procedure1. Inject current (measured current) in one phase until the signal

EF4--STIN1 appears on the corresponding binary output or on the lo-cal HMI unit.

2. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN1>.

3. Switch off the fault current.

4. If “RevBlRestr” is used, inject current (110% of the setting) with 25% and 40% of 2nd harmonic, to find out the setting of “2ndHarmStab”. Wait longer than the set value t1.

No EF4--TRIP signal should appear if the harmonic content is higher then the setting (2ndHarmStab).

5. Switch off the fault current.

6. Inject the polarising voltage -3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle between voltage and current to 155°, the current leading the voltage.

7. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value t1.

No EF4--TRIP should appear.

8. Switch off the fault current and the polarising voltage.

9. Continue with section 19.4.4.

19.4.4 Testing the time setting “t1”

Procedure1. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to

about 110% of the setting operating current (IN1>), and switch off the current with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

Page 158: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

145

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the EF4 protection.

Use the EF4--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

3. Compare the measured time with the set value t1.

4. Activate the EF4-BLKTR binary input.

5. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value t1.

No EF4--TRIP should appear, only start signal “EF4--STIN1”.

6. Reset the EF4-BLKTR input.

7. Switch off the fault current and the polarising voltage.

8. Continue with section 19.4.4 for current step 2 and 3.

19.5 Testing the Switch-onto-fault

19.5.1 Testing the switch-onto-fault with setting 1 = IN2> and 2 = IN4>Res

Procedure1. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to

about 110% of the setting operating current (IN2>), and switch off the current with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

2. Activate the EF4--BC binary input and switch on the fault current.

Use the EF4--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer. The time should be 300 ms.

19.5.2 Testing the switch-onto-fault with setting 2 = IN4>Res

Procedure1. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to

about 110% of the setting operating current (IN4>), and switch off the current with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

2. Activate the EF4--BC binary input and switch on the fault current.

Use the EF4--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

3. Compare the measured time with the set value t4U.

Page 159: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

146

Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

19.6 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 160: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

147

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

20 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in sectction 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The verification is divided in two main parts. The first part is common to all fuse failure super-vision options, and checks that binary inputs and outputs operate as expected according to actual configuration. In the second part the relevant set operate values are measured.

The corresponding binary signals that inform the operator about the operation of the FUSE func-tion are available on the local human-machine interface (HMI) unit under the menu:

Service Report/Functions/FuseFailure/FuncOutputs

20.1 Checking that the binary inputs and outputs operate as expected

Procedure1. Simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase currents

in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with all of them equal to their rated values.

2. Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-DISC binary input.

• The signal FUSE-VTSU should appear with almost no time delay.• No signals FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH should appear on the

terminal.• Only the distance protection function operates.• No other undervoltage-dependent functions must operate.

3. Disconnect the dc voltage from the FUSE-DISC binary input terminal.

4. Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-MCB binary input.

• The FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals should appear without any time delay.

• No undervoltage-dependent functions must operate.

5. Disconnect the dc voltage from the FUSE-MCB binary input terminal.

6. Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the logical output signals on the terminal binary outputs.

FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals should simultaneously appear.

7. After more than 5 seconds disconnect the remaining two phase volt-ages and all three currents.

• There should be no change in the high status of the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ.

• The signal FUSE-VTF3PH will appear.

Page 161: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

148

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

8. Simultaneously establish normal voltage and current operating con-ditions and observe the corresponding output signals.

They should change to the logical 0 as follows:

• Signal FUSE-VTF3PH after about 25 ms• Signal FUSE-VTSU after about 50 ms• Signal FUSE-VTSZ after about 200 ms

20.2 Measuring the operate value for the negative sequence functionMeasure the operate value for the negative sequence function, if included in the terminal.

Procedure1. Simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase currents

in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with all of them equal to their rated values.

2. Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the FUSE-VTSU signal appears.

3. Record the measured voltage and calculate the corresponding neg-ative-sequence voltage according to the equation.

Observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors:

(Equation 8)

4. Compare the result with the set value (consider that the set value 3U2> is in percentage of the base voltage U1b) of the negative-se-quence operating voltage.

20.3 Measuring the operate value for the zero sequence functionMeasure the operate value for the zero sequence function, if included in the terminal.

Where:

= the measured phase voltages

3 U2⋅ UL1 a2 UL2 a+⋅ UL3⋅+=

UL1 UL2 and UL3

a 1 ej 2 π⋅

3-----------

⋅ 0 5 j 32

-------+,–= =

Page 162: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

149

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Procedure1. Simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase currents

in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with all of them equal to their rated values.

2. Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the FUSE-VTSU signal appears.

3. Record the measured voltage and calculate the corresponding ze-ro-sequence voltage according to the equation.

Observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors.

(Equation 9)

4. Compare the result with the set value (consider that the set value 3U0> is in percentage of the base voltage U1b) of the zero-sequence operating voltage.

20.4 Checking the operation of the du/dt, di/dt based functionCheck the operation of the du/dt, di/dt based function, if included in the terminal.

Procedure1. Simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase currents

in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with all of them equal to their rated values.

2. Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-CBCLOSED binary in-put.

3. Change the voltages and currents in all three phases simultanously.

The voltage change should be greater then set DU> and the current change should be less than the set DI<.

• The FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals appear without any time delay. If the remaining voltage levels are higher than the set U< of the DLD function, only a pulse is achieved.

• FUSE-VTF3PH should appear after 5 seconds, if the remaining volt-age levels are lower than the set U< of the DLD function.

Where:

= the measured phase voltages.

3 U0⋅ UL1 UL2 UL3+ +=

UL1 , UL2 and UL3

Page 163: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

150

Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4. Apply normal conditions as in step 1.

The FUSE-VTSU, FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH signals should re-set, if activated. See step 3.

5. Change the voltages and currents in all three phases simultanously.

The voltage change should be greater then set DU> and the current change should be greater then the set DI<.

The FUSE-VTSU, FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH signals should not appear.

6. Disconnect the dc voltage to the FUSE-CBCLOSED binary input.

7. Apply normal conditions as in step 1.

8. Repeat step 3.

9. Connect the nominal voltages in all three phases and feed a current below the operate level in all three phases.

10. Keep the current constant. Disconnect the voltage in all three phas-es simultaneously.

The FUSE-VTSU, FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH signals should not appear.

20.5 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 164: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

151

High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

21 High speed binary output logic (HSBO)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Since the high-speed binary out logic is dependent upon other function blocks (HS---, ZM1-, ZC1P-, ZCOM- and TRIP-) in order to operate, those functions have to be set into operating mode (On).

21.1 HSBO- trip from communication logicWhenever a trip appears during these tests, it should be possible to block it through the function input HSBO-BLKZCTR. Activation of either HSBO-BLKHSTR or HSBO-BLKHSCS should not block the trip outputs in this case. It should also be possible to block the trip signals at the backing function from which the internal signals are derived (ZC1P, ZCOM or TRIP).

Test for three of the trip schemes in ZC1P (Blocking Scheme not included).

Procedure1. Apply inputs in different combinations to ZC1P-CACCLn, ZC1P-CR-

Lm / ZC1P-CRMPH and check the outputs of HSBO-TRLx. For each trip, test the blocking action for all three HSBO blocking inputs and ZC1P-BLOCK.Check results according to the used scheme.

ZC1P/SchemeType = Intertrip

No local trip condition is required (-CACCLn). Trip output HSBO-TRLx will be activated directly according to corresponding -CRLx. Activation of -CRMPH should result in a three-phase trip.

ZC1P/SchemeType = PermissiveUR

When -CACCLn is applied in the same time as -CRLn (same phases), a trip output should appear in the n-phase(s), HSBO-TRLn. If -CRMPH is applied instead of -CRLn, a trip should appear in the same phase as -CACCLn.

ZC1P/SchemeType = PermissiveOR

Same result as for the permissive underreach test should be obtained.

2. Remove applied signals.

Note! No carrier send should appear during the tests in this section.

Page 165: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

152

High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

21.2 ZCOM trip schemesTest for three of the trip schemes in ZCOM (Blocking Scheme not included) together with TRIP.

Procedure1. Apply inputs in different combinations to TRIP-PSLn, ZCOM-CACC

and ZCOM-CR and check the outputs of HSBO-TRLx. For each trip test the blocking action for all three HSBO blocking inputs, ZCOM-BLOCK and TRIP-BLOCK. Check results according to the used scheme and trip program.

• ZCOM/SchemeType = Intertrip• TRIP/Program = 1/2/3ph

When -PSLn is applied in the same time as -CR, a trip output should ap-pear in the n-phase(s), HSBO-TRLn.

• ZCOM/SchemeType = PermissiveUR• TRIP/Program = 1/3ph

When -PSLn is applied in the same time as -CACC and -CR, a trip output should appear in the n-phase(s), HSBO-TRLn.

• ZCOM/SchemeType = PermissiveOR • TRIP/Program = 3ph

Each time -CACC and -CR are activated at the same time, a three-phase trip should be obtained, independent of any phase selection (-PSLn).

2. Remove applied signals.

21.3 HSBO- trip from the distance protection zone 1 function (ZM1)In order to test the performance of the high-speed binary out function alone without any inter-ference from other functions the binary outputs configured for the HSBO function must not car-ry any other signals. For example, if the outputs are shared with the TRIP function the TRIP function should be switched off.

Switch the HS function off as well.

Whenever a trip appears during these tests, it should be possible to block it through the function input HSBO-BLKHSTR.

Note that no carrier send will be issued from the distance protection function zone 1. Activation of HSBO-BLKZCTR or HSBO-BLKHSCS should not block any outputs in this test.

Use the 3-phase test set to achieve the specified conditions.

Suggested fault characteristics, for all types of faults:

Page 166: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

153

High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

• Prefault conditions: Uphase = Ub V, 0° I = 0.0 A, 0°• Fault conditions: Within set operating characteristic of ZM1 function.

Procedure1. Apply faults according to table 28. Trip and carrier send outputs

should appear as indicated (with YES).

2. Remove applied signals.

3. Set the terminal in normal service.

Table 28: Output signals for different fault types

21.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Fault type

Signal L1 L2 L3 L1,L2 L2,L3 L3,L1 L1,L2,L3

HSBO-TRL1 YES YES YES YES

HSBO-TRL2 YES YES YES YES

HSBO-TRL3 YES YES YES YES

HSBO-CSL1

HSBO-CSL2

HSBO-CSL3

HSBO-CSMPH

Page 167: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

154

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

22 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:

• One for a phase-to-earth fault

Ensure that the maximum continuous current of the terminal does not exceed four times its rated value.

22.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

22.1.1 Phase overcurrent protection

Procedure1. Inject a phase current in the terminal with start below the setting val-

ue.

2. Increase the injected current in the Ln phase until the IOC--TRLn (n=1-3) signal appears.

3. Switch off the fault current.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

4. Compare the measured operating current with the set value.

22.1.2 Residual overcurrent protection (non-dir.)

Procedure1. Inject a phase current in the terminal with start below the setting val-

ue.

2. Increase the injected current in the Ln phase until the IOC--TRN sig-nal appears.

3. Switch off the fault current.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

4. Compare the measured operating current with the set value.

22.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 168: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

155

Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

23 Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)When testing the differential protection it is important to be aware of that actions taken locally may cause operation of the terminal in the remote end.

At commissioning and after changes in the current circuits, the trip signals at both terminals must be blocked permanently before the dc supply is connected. This precaution is taken to avoid un-wanted local and remote trip in case of error in the current circuits. The blocking can not be done by the COMBITEST test switch. It has to be made on the station side of the test switch because the test switch disconnects the current inputs to the terminal and thus causes current unbalance in the differential circuit. This will cause the remote end terminal to trip if not blocked. The blocking of the trip signal must be maintained, until the test has been performed at both termi-nals.

Any work in any of the terminals, such as injecting current or to short-circuit the current during load transfer on the line, will result in a local and REMOTE end trip.

When the current balance is disturbed by any action, the protections at both line ends must be blocked.

Before performing any work in the current circuit to the line differential protection, the Test-Mode must be activated and saved. The protection will not enter into test mode without saving the command.

When the protection is equipped with a COMBITEST test switch, inserting the test handle will automatically force the protection into test mode. This function is also achieved by activating the Test digital input. The test mode command must be saved to be activated.

It is sufficient if one of the terminals is set in test mode. The trip function is blocked automati-cally at both line ends, when one of the protection terminals is in test mode. Thus the protection can be tested without any manual actions in the remote station.

Testing can be performed only when the terminals communicate with each other and if one and one only of the terminals is in test mode.

To activate the local trip relays during the test for operating time measurement, the blocking of the trip is overridden in the terminal in test mode by the command “Local trip”.

For a complete test of the protection, the tests must be repeated at both terminals.

Page 169: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

156

Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

When one of the protections is in test mode, the opposite terminal mode of operation is changed. In the opposite terminal, the received current values (a and b Fourier coefficients) are echoed back to the other terminal, but transposed in the following way: the received value for the L1 phase is returned as the L2 current, L2 is returned as L3, and L3 as L1.

Figure 33: Stabilisation characteristic

(Equation 10)

Note!When a current is injected into phase L1 in the terminal, it will appear as an IDiff in phase L1 and L2 with 50% of the value as an IBias and in phase L3 with 25% of the value as an IBias. When the current is sufficiently high, the protection will operate in phase L1 and L2 in the ter-minal in test mode, but it will not operate in the remote terminal. For the actual reading of IDiff and IBias, see step 6 in the test procedure. Also see figure 33 and equations 10, 11 and 12.

IDiff ILocal IRemote+=

Page 170: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

157

Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

(Equation 11)

(Equation 12)

The test is performed by injecting a single and a symmetrical three-phase current. If the optional charging current compensation function is included, the CCComp shall be Off and no measuring voltage connected to the terminal.

23.1 Testing the line differential protection

Procedure1. Block the trip signal.

The blocking can not be done by the COMBITEST test switch. It has to be made on the station side of the test switch.

2. Set the protection in test mode from the HMI unit.

The TestMode is found in the menu under:

Test/TestMode/Operation

The TestMode command must be saved in order to be activated. When the protection is equipped with COMBITEST test switch, the test mode is automatically activated but not saved when the test handle is inserted.

3. Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section “Prepare for test” in this chapter.

4. Set the Disturbance report to Off.

This command is found in the menu under:

Test/TestMode/DisturbReport

5. Activate the trip by setting Release local.

This command is found in the menu under:

Test/TestMode/Differential

This command must be saved in order to be activated. Observe that the command ReleaseLocal will allow the trip outputs to be activated during the tests.

IBiasILocal IRemote+

2-------------------------------------------=

IBias( ) Evaluate Max IBias( )Own phase[ ] OR 0.5 IBias( ) Other phases⋅[ ]{ }=

Page 171: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

158

Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

6. Inject a current in L1 and increase the current until operation in phase L1 and L2 takes place.

The injected operation value must correspond to the set IMinOp· Ir·CT-Factor. This value is to be read as IDiffL1 and IDiffL2, and 50% of IDiffL1 as IBiasL1 and IBiasL2. The IDiffL3 should be zero and IBiasL3 25% of IDiffL1. These values are read on the HMI under:

Service Report/Functions/Differential/Diff Values

7. Repeat step 6 for phase L2 and L3.

The result shall be transposed one, respectively two steps.

8. Inject a symmetrical three-phase current, and increase the current until operation is achieved in all three phases.

The IMinOp·Ir·CTFactor value shall be obtained for operation and read for IDiff in all three phases. 100% of IDiff shall be read for IBias in all three phases.

9. Read the transmission delay on the HMI.

This command is found in the menu under:

Service value/Functions/Differential/DiffCom/ComInfo

This delay is not allowed to exceed 30ms (changed from 24 ms to 30 ms in software revision 2p5 r03). The displayed value is 2x15 ms i.e. trans-mission time from line end A to B + B to A.

10. Measure the operating time by injection of a single-phase current in phase L1.

The injected current should be 4 times the operating current. The time measurement is stopped by the trip output from the protection. The oper-ating time should be 28-33 ms + 2 times the communication transmission delay.

11. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the current transform-er.

12. Read and check the service values of the three-phase current.

13. When the current transformers are connected, put the protection in operation by switching off the test mode.

After the test mode is set to Off, the command must be saved to activate the protection. The yellow LED shall stop flashing.

Page 172: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

159

Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

14. With a through load current of minimum 20% of the Ir · CTFactor, the IDiff and IBias are read in all phases.

The IDiff should be lower than 10% of the actual secondary current divid-ed by the CTFactor, the IBias should be equal to this current. This mea-surement is necessary at commissioning to guarantee that there is no phase shift between the terminals.

15. Remove the external blocking of the trip signal when this test has been successfully performed.

16. A complete commissioning or maintenance test requires that the test is repeated at both terminals.

17. When the direct transfer trip is used, this function has to be tested by activating its input, to check that trip is achieved at the remote ter-minal. During this test, the trip circuit has to be blocked.

23.2 Testing the charging current compensation

Procedure1. When the tests of the differential function have been performed, set

the CCComp = On and check that the settings for XC1, XC0 and IMi-nOpComp are correct.

2. Check that all currents are disconnected from the terminal and con-nect symmetrical three-phase voltages to the corresponding voltage input.

3. Increase the three-phase voltage to its rated value.

Read the values of the differential and bias currents under the menu:

ServiceReport/DiffValues

They must correspond to the value:

(Equation 13)

The bias currents are available under the same menu. They must be equal to the measured differential current in each phase.

IDiff = IBias for each phase.

U Represents measured phase voltage.

IDiffL1 IDiffL2 IDiffL3 UXC1 CTFactor⋅--------------------------------------------= = =

Page 173: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

160

Line differential protection, phase segregated (DIFL)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4. Disconnect the voltages from the terminal and connect only one phase to all three voltage inputs of the terminal.

5. Increase the measured voltage to the rated phase value and observe the values of the differential and bias currents, presented on the ter-minal.

They must correspond to the following values:

(Equation 14)

(Equation 15)

6. With the terminal in normal operation, not in Test mode, and with the line energised, the IDiffL1, IDiffL2 and IDiffL3 are measured under the service report menu with CCComp temporary set to Off at both ter-minals. Thereafter measure the values with the CCComp set to On.

Note! Setting CCComp to Off might cause the terminal to trip. Therefore make sure that the trip outputs are blocked.

7. Check the charging current compensation by comparing the mea-sured IDiffLx values.

The measured IDiffLx shall be near zero in each separate phase with the CCC used.

8. Remove the external blocking of the trip signal when this test has been successfully performed.

23.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

IDiffL1 IDiffL2 IDiffL3 2 U⋅XC0 CTFactor⋅--------------------------------------------= = =

IBiasL1 IBiasL2 IBiasL3 UXC0 CTFactor⋅--------------------------------------------= = =

Page 174: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

161

Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

24 Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The logic is checked during the secondary injection test of the impedance measuring zones.

Procedure1. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

2. Deactivate the conditions for accelerated function.

3. Apply a phase to earth fault at 100% of line impedance.

4. Check that the fault is tripped with the second zone time delay.

5. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

6. Activate the condition for accelerated function either by the auto-recloser or by the loss of load.

7. Apply a phase to earth fault at 100% of line impedance.

8. Check that the fault is tripped “instantaneously”.

9. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 175: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

162

Loss of voltage check (LOV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

25 Loss of voltage check (LOV)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

25.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

Procedure1. Check that the input logical signals LOV-BLOCK, LOV-BC and

LOV-VTSU are logical zero.

2. Supply a three phase rated voltage in all three phases and note on the local HMI that the LOV-TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.

Logical signals for loss of voltage check protection are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/LossOfVoltage/FuncOutputs

3. Switch off the voltage in all three phases.

After seven seconds LOV-TRIP signal appears on the corresponding bi-nary output or on the local HMI. Note that LOV--TRIP at this time is a pulse signal, duration should be about 150 ms.

4. Inject the measured voltages to their rated values for at least three seconds.

5. Activate the LOV-BC binary input.

6. Simultaneously disconnect all the three phase voltages from the ter-minal.

No LOV-TRIP signal should appear.

7. Inject the measured voltages to their rated values for at least three seconds.

8. Activate the LOV-VTSU binary input.

9. Simultaneously disconnect all the three phase voltages from the ter-minal.

No LOV-TRIP signal should appear.

10. Reset the LOV-VTSU binary input.

11. Inject the measured voltages to their rated values for at least three seconds.

12. Activate the LOV-BLOCK binary input.

Page 176: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

163

Loss of voltage check (LOV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13. Simultaneously disconnect all the three phase voltages from the ter-minal.

No LOV-TRIP signal should appear.

14. Reset the LOV-BLOCK binary input.

15. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 177: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

164

Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

26 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)Stabilized ac current and voltage generators and corresponding current, voltage, power and fre-quency meters with very high accuracy are necessary for testing the alternating quantity mea-suring function. The operating ranges of the generators must correspond to the rated alternate current and voltage of each terminal.

Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section “Preparing for test” in this chapter. Connect the generators and instruments to the corresponding input terminals of a unit under test.

26.1 Verifying the settings

Procedure1. Supply the terminal with voltages and currents.

Check that the values presented on the HMI unit correspond to the mag-nitude of input measured quantities within the limits of declared accura-cy. The mean service values are available under the submenu:

Service Report/ServiceValues

The phasors of up to five input currents and voltages are available under the submenu:

Service Report/Phasors/Primary

2. Check the operation of ADBS or IDBS when applicable. Compare with the expected values.

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately with the RepInt = 0 setting. The value on the HMI follows the changes in the input measuring quantity continuously.

3. Check the set operate levels of the monitoring function by changing the magnitude of input quantities and observing the operation of the corresponding output relays.

The output contact changes its state when the changes in the input mea-suring quantity are higher than the set values HIWARN, HIALARM, or lower than the set values LOWWARN, LOWALARM.

26.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 178: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

165

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

27 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)A stabilized direct current generator and mA meter with very high accuracy for measurement of direct current is needed in order to test the dc measuring module. The generator operating range and the measuring range of the mA meter must be at least between -25 and 25 mA.

Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter. Connect the current generator and mA meter to the direct current input channels to be tested.

27.1 Verifying the settings

Procedure1. Consider the need to block output signals.

2. Check that the values presented on the HMI module corresponds to the magnitude of input direct current within the limits of declared ac-curacy.

The service value is available under the submenu:

Service Report/I/O/Slotnm-MIMx/MIxy-Value

3. Check the operation of ADBS or IDBS function when applicable. Compare with the expected values.

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately with the setting of RepInt = 0. The value on the HMI must change only when the changes in input current (compared to the present value) are higher than the set value for the selected dead band.

4. Check the operating monitoring levels by changing the magnitude of input current and observing the operation of the corresponding out-put relays.

The output contact changes its state when the changes in the input mea-suring quantity are higher than the set values RMAXAL, HIWARN, HI-ALARM, or lower than the set values LOWWARN, LOWALARM, RMINAL.

where:

nm represents the serial number of a slot with tested mA input module

x represents the serial number of a mA input module in a terminal

y represents the serial number of a measuring channel on module x.

Page 179: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

166

Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

27.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 180: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

167

Multiple command (CM) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

28 Multiple command (CM)Test of the multiple command function block is recommended to be performed in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system as an acceptance test (FAT/SAT) or as parts of that sys-tem, because the command function blocks are connected in a delivery-specific way between bays and the station level.

Command function blocks included in the operation of different built-in functions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.

Page 181: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

168

Overload supervision (OVLD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

29 Overload supervision (OVLD)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

29.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values

Procedure1. Check that the input logical signals OVLD-BLOCK is logical zero and

note on the local HMI that the OVLD-TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.

Logical signals for overload supervision protection are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/OverLoad/FuncOutputs

2. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in all three phases to about 110% of the setting operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

3. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the OVLD protection.

Use the OVLD-TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

4. Compare the measured time with the set value t.

5. Activate the OVLD-BLOCK binary input.

6. Switch on the fault current (110% of setting) and wait longer than the set value t.

No OVLD-TRIP signal should appear.

7. Switch off the fault current.

8. Reset the OVLD-BLOCK binary input.

9. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in all three phases to about 90% of the measured operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

10. Switch on the fault current and wait longer than the set value t.

No OVLD--TRIP signal should appear.

11. Switch off the fault current.

Page 182: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

169

Overload supervision (OVLD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

12. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 183: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

170

Phase selection logic (PHS) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

30 Phase selection logic (PHS)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The phase selectors operate on the same measuring principles as the impedance measuring zones. So it is necessary to follow the same principles as for distance protection, when perform-ing the secondary injection tests.

Measure operating characteristics during constant current conditions. Keep the measured current as close as possible to its rated value or lower. But ensure that it is higher than 30% of the rated current.

Ensure that the maximum continuous current of a terminal does not exceed four times its rated value, if the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage condi-tions.

To verify the settings the operating points according to figures 34, 35, and 36 should be tested. See also table 29 for information.

Figure 34: Operate characteristic for phase selection element, forward direction for single phase faults.

en01000063.vsd

R

jX

ArgDir

P2

P1

ArgNegR

es

Page 184: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

171

Phase selection logic (PHS) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 35: Phase selection characteristic for ph-ph faults

Figure 36: Phase selection characteristic for three-phase faults

en01000064.vsd

jX

70°

RArgDir

P2

P1

ArgNegR

es

en01000065.vsd

R

jX

100°

30°

P1

P2

Page 185: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

172

Phase selection logic (PHS) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Table 29: Test points

30.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

Procedure1. Supply the terminal with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

2. Apply the fault condition and slowly decrease the measured imped-ance to find the operate value for of the phase to earth loop, test point P1, according to figure 34. Compare the result of the measure-ment with the expected value according to table 29.

The corresponding binary signals that inform about the operation of the phase-selection measuring elements are available in the local HMI under the menu:

Service Report/Functions/PhaseSelection

3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 to find the operate values for the remaining test points according to figures 34, 35 and 36 and to table table 29.

4. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Phase-to-earth L3-E (Ω/Loop) Phase-to-phase loops L1-L2 (Ω/Loop)

Three-phase (Ω/Loop)

P1X = 0

P1R = RFPE

P1X = 0

P1R= RFPP

P1X = 0

P1R =1.1 · RFPP

P2R = 0

P2X = 2 · X1PP

P2R = 0

P2X = 2.67 · X1PP

P2R = 0P2X

13--- 2 X1PE⋅ X0PE+( )⋅=

Page 186: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

173

Pole discordance protection (PD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

31 Pole discordance protection (PD)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Procedure1. Activate the PD---POLDISC binary input, and measure the operating

time of the PD protection.

Use the PD---TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

2. Compare the measured time with the set value t.

3. Reset the PD---POLDISC binary input.

4. Activate the PD---1POPEN binary input.

(This test should be performed together with AR).

5. Activate the PD---POLDISC binary input.

No PD---TRIP signal should appear.

6. Reset both PD---1POPEN and PD---POLDISC binary inputs.

7. Activate the PD---BLOCK binary input.

8. Activate the PD---POLDISC binary input.

No PD---TRIP signal should appear.

9. Reset both PD---BLOCK and PD---POLDISC binary inputs.

10. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 187: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

174

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

32 Pole slip protection (PSP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The oscillation detection function in PSP operates in two different operating modes:

• “One of three” phase operating mode• “Two of three” phase operating mode

32.1 Measuring the operating characteristicsTesting instructions for measurement of the operation characteristics are related to figure 37. Apply to the terminal the desired reach setting. The operating characteristic should be tested by applying the three phase faults in different points, to avoid special testing for the one of three and two of three operating modes.

32.1.1 Applying additional settingsApply the following additional settings on the terminal

• TrFwRv = On• TrIncFwRv = On• TrOutFwRv = Off• TrFastFwRv = On• TrDelFwRv = Off• nFastFwRv = 0• nDelFwRv = 10• TrRvFw = On• TrIncRvFw = On• TrOutRvFw = Off• TrFastRvFw = On• TrDelRvFw = Off• nFastRvFw = 0• nDelRvFw = 10

32.1.2 Measuring the impedance boundaries

1. Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to XM = 0 (mea-sured reactance) and measured resistance (absolute value) to

(Equation 16)

RM 1.2 R1REXT⋅=

Page 188: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

175

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Decrease slowly (the transition from R1REXT to R1RINT must take longer time then the time set on the tP1 timer) the resistance and ob-serve on local HMI the corresponding operating signals as follows:

PSP--ZOUT appears when

(Equation 17)

PSP--ZIN appears when

(Equation 18)

PSP--TRIP appears when

(Equation 19)

0.95 R1REXT⋅ RM 1.05 R1REXT⋅≤ ≤

0.95 R1RINT⋅ RM 1.05 R1RINT⋅≤ ≤

0.95 R1RTR⋅ RM 1.05 R1RTR⋅≤ ≤

Page 189: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

176

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 37: Operating characteristics with suggested testing points.

3. Set the measured impedance in the third quadrant to XM = 0 (mea-sured reactance) and measured resistance (absolute value) to

(Equation 20)

4. Decrease slowly the resistance and observe on local HMI the corre-sponding operating signals as follows:

PSP--ZOUT appears when

R

jX ZSB

ZL

ZSA

99001036.vsd

SCA

R1REXT

R1RINT

R1RTR

R1LEXT

R1LINT

R1LTR

X1FEXTX1FINT

X1PSLFWR1PSLFW

X1PSLRVR1PSLRV

Z1REXT

RM 1.2 R1LEXT⋅=

Page 190: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

177

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

(Equation 21)

PSP--ZIN appears when

(Equation 22)

PSP--TRIP appears when

(Equation 23)

5. Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to RM = 0 (mea-sured resistance) and measured reactance to:

(Equation 24)

6. Decrease slowly the reactance and observe on local HMI the corre-sponding operating signals as follows:

PSP--ZOUT appears when

(Equation 25)

PSP--ZIN appears when

(Equation 26)

7. Set the measured impedance in the third quadrant to RM = 0 (mea-sured resistance) and measured reactance (absolute value) to:

(Equation 27)

0.95 R1LEXT⋅ RM 1.05 R1LEXT⋅≤ ≤

0.95 R1LINT⋅ RM 1.05 R1LINT⋅≤ ≤

0.95 R1LTR⋅ RM 1.05 R1LTR⋅≤ ≤

XM 1.2 X1 FEXT⋅=

0.95 X1FEXT⋅ XM 1.05 X1FEXT⋅≤ ≤

0.95 X1FINT⋅ XM 1.05 X1 FINT⋅≤ ≤

XM 1.2 X1 FEXT⋅=

Page 191: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

178

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

8. Decrease slowly the reactance and observe on local HMI the corre-sponding operating signals as follows:

PSP--ZOUT appears when

(Equation 28)

PSP--ZIN appears when

(Equation 29)

9. Set the measured impedance in the third quadrant to

(Equation 30)

and

(Equation 31)

10. Decrease slowly the measured reactance until the signal PSP--TRIP appears on the local HMI.

The recorded operating value should be in the following limits:

(Equation 32)

11. Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to

(Equation 33)

and

(Equation 34)

0.95 X1RE XT⋅ XM 1.05 X1REXT⋅≤ ≤

0.95 X1RINT⋅ XM 1.05 X1RINT⋅≤ ≤

RM R1PSLRV–=

XM 1.2 X1PSLRV–( )⋅=

0.95 X1PSLRV⋅ XM 1.05 X1PSLRV⋅≤ ≤

RM R1PSLRV=

XM 1.2 X1PSLRV⋅=

Page 192: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

179

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

12. Decrease slowly the measured absolute value of the reactance until the signal PSP--TRIP appears on the local HMI.

The recorded operating value should be in the following limits:

(Equation 35)

13. Set the measured impedance in the first quadrant to

(Equation 36)

and

(Equation 37)

14. Decrease slowly the measured resistance until the signal PSP--ZOUT appears on the local HMI. Check that the measured value and the calculated angle correspond to the condition:

(Equation 38)

Parameter R1REXTM is a recorded value of the measured resistance when measuring the operating resistance for the R1REXT operating characteristic.

15. Check the correct operation of the “two of three” phase operating mode.

16. Apply the single phase fault and repeat the measurement of the op-erating value for the R1RTR.

The PSP--TRIP signal must not appear when the measured resistance is decreased under the previous measured operating value.

17. Observe on local HMI also the PSP--START functional output signal.

It should be active always when the slowly decrease impedance enters the inner oscillation detection boundary.

18. Apply the required settings for the operating parameters, which have been changed for the purposes of the measurement section 32.1.1.

0.95 X1PSLFW⋅ XM 1.05 X1PSLFW⋅≤ ≤

RM 1.2 R1R EXT⋅=

XM 0.5 X1FEXT⋅=

SCA 5O– 0.5 X1FEXT⋅RM R1REXTM–---------------------------------------------⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞atan SCA 5O+≤ ≤

Page 193: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

180

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

32.2 Testing the pole slip functionalityProgrammable testing equipment is required for testing of the complete functionality. Two pos-sible ways of testing are applicable:

• It is possible to replay by the testing equipment some of the most characteristic transients, which have been recorded by digital disturbance recorders during the system study stage. This way it is necessary to observe the responses of the func-tion on particular recorded transients and compare them with the required re-sponse.

• It is possible to program the sequence of the measuring points in the testing equipment and their repetition rate. The programs should be prepared according to the settings applied and the required functionality of the PSP function. Figure 38 presents two typical examples of the required operating points to be pro-grammed.

The first programmed sequence (clockwise) includes two operating points (3 and 4) in the fast tripping area. The sequence is applicable for testing of the functionality, when the FwRv oscil-lations should cause the tripping action. The following special requirements should be observed:

• The measured impedance should remain for the first sequence in the operating point 2 longer than the time set on the initial timer tP1. For the consecutive se-quences the time should be longer than the one set on the tP2 timer.

• The PSP protection should issue the PSP--TRIP signal, if it is set for the incoming trip in the fast tripping region, when the measured impedance reaches the operat-ing point 3. It is necessary to observe that the sequence must be completed for nFastFwRv times.

• The PSP protection should issue the PSP--TRIP signal, if it is set for the outgoing trip in the fast tripping region, when the measured impedance reaches the operat-ing point 4. It is necessary to observe that the sequence must be completed for nFastFwRv times.

• The programmed sequence must reach also the measuring points 5 and 6, if the oscillation is supposed to be completed and a higher number of oscillations is re-quired for the final trip command. Observe also, that the time required to move from point 5 over the points 6, 7, 8, and 1 to point 2 again must be shorter then the time set on the tW timer.

Page 194: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

181

Pole slip protection (PSP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 38: Two examples of programmed impedance measuring points for functional testing of the pole slip protection.

The second programmed sequence (anti-clockwise) on figure 38 presents a RvFw transition with operating points 3 and 4 in delayed tripping area. The sequence is applicable for testing of the functionality, when the RvFw oscillations should cause the tripping action. The same special re-quirements should be observed as for the first operating sequence.

32.3 Testing the additional functionalityAll additional functionality, as described in this document, should be tested only, when used in actual application. The functionality should be tested by the so called "go - no go” tests accord-ing to the expected operation under the certain system conditions. No special instructions can be given for such tests. The instructions should be prepared according to the requirements of the actual application.

32.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

R

jX

ZL

ZSA

99001037.vsd

12345

6

7 8

ZSB

1 2 3

45

6

87

Page 195: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

182

Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

33 Power swing detection (PSD)The aim of this instruction is to verify the setting of PSD and to verify that the PSD covers all impedance zones that shall be blocked by the PSD.

Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Before start of this process, all impedance measuring zones shall be set and in operation. The inner zone of the PSD must cover all zones to be blocked by the PSD with at least 10% margin. Se figure 39 below.

Figure 39: Operating principle and characteristic of the PSD function

The PSD can operate in two modes by the configuration; “one of three phase operation” and “two out of three phase operation”. Look into the configuration to see which one is valid the ter-minal.

jX

R

tP1

Impedance locus at power swing

99000159.vsd

− ⋅KX X IN1

− X IN1

X IN1

KX X IN⋅ 1

− ⋅KR R IN1

KR R IN⋅ 1

−R IN1

INR1

Page 196: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

183

Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

33.1 Testing overview

Procedure1. Re-configure the binary output from the PSD--ZOUT signal to the

PSD--START signal of the PSD function.

It is also possible to observe the PSD--START signal on the regular out-put terminals, if provided during the engineering stage. Check the corre-sponding terminal documentation.

2. Decrease slowly the measured voltages in all three phases until the W-meter detects the appearance of the PSD--START signal.

3. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

4. Decrease instantaneously voltages in all three phases to the values, which are for approximately 20% lower than the set value R1IN.

The START signal must not appear.

5. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

33.2 Testing the one-of-three-phase operation

Procedure1. Check the existing (default) configuration of the following function

input signals:

PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, PSD--BLK2PH and record the connections.

2. Reconfigure the terminal according to the following list:

• PSD--REL1PH to FIXD-ON• PSD--BLK1PH to FIXD-OFF• PSD--REL2PH to FIXD-OFF• PSD--BLK2PH to FIXD-ON

3. Disconnect the L2 and L3 currents from the terminal and check that they are short-circuited on the output terminal of the testing equip-ment.

4. Decrease slowly the measured voltages until the PSD--START signal appears.

5. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

33.3 Testing the two-of-three-phase operation

Procedure1. Reconfigure the terminal according to the following list:

Page 197: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

184

Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

• PSD--REL1PH to FIXD-OFF• PSD--BLK1PH to FIXD-ON• PSD--REL2PH to FIXD-ON• PSD--BLK2PH to FIXD-OFF

2. Decrease slowly the measured voltages to the value, which is for ap-proximately 20% lower than the operation value for the R1IN measur-ing point.

No PSD--START signal must appear.

3. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

4. Connect the phase L2 current to the terminal again.

5. Decrease the measured voltages until the PSD--START signal ap-pears.

6. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

7. Connect the phase L3 current to the terminal.

8. Return the original configuration for the functional inputs PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, and PSD--BLK2PH.

33.4 Testing the tEF timer and functionality

Procedure1. Check and record the default configuration for the PSD--TRSP,

PSD--I0CHECK, PSD--BLKI01, PSD--BLKI02, and PSD--BLOCK func-tional inputs.

2. Re-configure the functional inputs PSD--TRSP and PSD--I0CHECK to two empty binary inputs of a terminal.

3. Configure functional inputs PSD--BLKI01, and PSD--BLKI02 to the FIXD-ON functional output and the PSD--BLOCK functional input to the FIXD-OFF functional input.

4. Connect the binary input towards the PSD--I0CHECK functional in-put via an open switch to the constant positive dc voltage.

5. Connect the binary input towards the PSD--TRSP functional input via a closed switch to the constant positive dc voltage.

6. Decrease the measured voltages slowly until the START signal ap-pears.

7. Close the switch towards the binary input with PSD--I0CHECK con-nection and observe the PSD--START signal.

It must reset instantaneously.

8. Open the switch towards the PSD--I0CHECK functional input.

Page 198: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

185

Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

9. Open the switch towards the PSD--TRSP functional input and close with some time delay the switch towards the PSD--I0CHECK func-tional input.

The PSD--START signal resets, if the time difference between opening the first and closing the second switch is shorter than the time delay set on the tEF timer. The PSD--START signal does not reset in the opposite case.

10. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

33.5 Testing the tR1 timer

Procedure1. Disconnect the dc voltage from the binary inputs connected to the

PSD--TRSP and PSD--I0CHECK functional inputs.

2. Connect the binary input towards the PSD--I0CHECK functional in-put via an open switch to the constant positive dc voltage.

3. Re-configure the PSD--BLKI02 functional input to the FIXD-OFF functional output.

4. Decrease the measured voltages slowly until the PSD--START signal appears.

5. Close the switch towards the PSD--I0CHECK binary input and ob-serve the PSD--START signal.

It must reset with the time delay set on the tR1 timer. It is also possible to measure this time delay with timer, which starts with closing of a switch and stops with the reset of a PSD--START signal on the corre-sponding binary output.

6. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

33.6 Testing the tR2 timer

Procedure1. Disconnect the dc voltage from the binary input connected to the

PSD--I0CHECK functional input.

2. Re-configure the functional input PSD--BLKI02 to the FIXD-ON func-tional input and PSD--BLKI01 to the FIXD-OFF functional output.

3. Decrease slowly the measured voltages until the PSD--START signal appears.

It should reset after the time delay, set on tR2 timer. It is also possible to measure the time delay tR2.

4. Connect for this purpose the timer to the binary output with the PSD--START signal.

Page 199: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

186

Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Start the timer with change of the signal from 0 to 1 and stop it with the change from 1 to 0.

6. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values

33.7 Testing the block input

Procedure1. Re-configure the functional input PSD--BLOCK to the binary input, to

which the PSD--I0CHECK has been configured so far.

2. Re-configure the functional input PSD--BLKI01 to the FIXD-ON func-tional input.

3. Decrease slowly the measured voltages in all three phases until the PSD--START signal appears.

4. Close the switch towards the PSD--BLOCK binary input and observe the PSD--START signal.

It must reset instantaneously.

5. Increase the measured voltages to their rated values.

6. Re-configure the functional inputs PSD--TRSP, PSD--I0CHECK, PSD--BLKI01, PSD--BLKI02, and PSD--BLOCK to their original con-figuration.

33.8 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 200: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

187

Power swing additional logic (PSL) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

34 Power swing additional logic (PSL)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Most of the testing equipment available on the market does not permit simulation of the pow-er-swing conditions and simultaneous occurrence of different faults with controlled fault imped-ance. For this reason it is necessary to enable the logic by connecting the PSL--STPSD input signal to some other functional signal, which is used for the testing purposes.

Make sure that the existing configuration permits monitoring of the PSL--CS, PSL--TRIP sig-nals on the binary outputs of the terminal. If not, configure it for testing purposes to some, not used, binary outputs.

34.1 Testing the carrier send and trip signals

Procedure1. Set the operation of all distance zones, which are supposed to be

blocked by the operation of the PSD function, to Off.

2. Configure the PSL--STPSD functional inputs to the ZMn--TRIP of the underreaching power-swing zone, if the underreaching communica-tion scheme is used.

3. Start instantaneously any kind of fault within the underreaching power-swing zone and check, that:

• The PSL--CS signal appears after the time delay, which is equal to the sum of set time delays for the underreaching zone tnPP or tnPE (dependent on the type of fault) and for the carrier send security timer tCS. Also add the usual operate time for the underreaching zone (ap-proximately. 30ms).

• The PSL--TRIP signal appears after the time delay, which is equal to the sum of set time delays for the underreaching zone tnPP or tnPE (dependent on the type of fault) and for the trip security timer tTrip. Also add the usual operate time for the underreaching zone (approx-imately. 30ms).

4. Simulate the receiving of the carrier signal so that the functional in-put signal PSL--CR becomes a logical one.

5. Configure the PSL--STPSD input to the output ZMn--START of the carrier accelerating zone (Power-swing overreaching zone).

6. Initiate any kind of fault within the carrier accelerating zone and check that the PSL--TRIP signal appears after the time, which is equal to the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

Also consider the (average) operate time of the carrier acceleration zone (approximately. 30ms).

Page 201: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

188

Power swing additional logic (PSL) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

34.2 Testing the influence of the residual overcurrent protectionAdditionally connect the REx 5xx terminal according to the test instructions for the directional O/C EF protection (section 12 "Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF)"), if the PSL is configured in a way, to be controlled by this protection.

Procedure1. Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault within both power-swing zones.

Make sure that none of PSL--CS and PSL--TRIP output signals appear after the time delays tCS and tTrip.

The PSL--BLKZMPP must appear together with the fault and must re-main active until the fault has been switched off plus the time delay, as set on the tBlkTr timer.

2. Initiate a Ph-Ph fault within the operating area of both power-swing zones.

Make sure that PSL--CS and PSL--TRIP output signals appear after the time delays tCS.

3. Switch On the operation of the zone 1 distance protection function and fulfill all the conditions for single-pole auto-reclosing.

4. Simulate a single-phase-to-earth fault within the reach of zone 1 and both power-swing zones.

The fault should cause a single-pole tripping and should be switched off with the normal operating time of zone 1.

5. Repeat the fault within the dead-time of single-pole auto-reclosing.

Make sure, that the PSL function perform a PSL--BLKZMPP signal and no PSL--CS and PSL--TRIP.

34.3 Controlling of the underreaching zone

Procedure1. Set the operation of all normal distance protection zones to On.

2. Simulate a fault without fault resistance in the middle of the distance protection zone 1.

Make sure that the trip appears within the operate time for the distance protection zone 1 and no PSL--BLKZMH output signal appears.

3. Switch Off the fault and prepare a new fault without fault resistance within the normal distance protection zone 2 operate area, but out-side the zone 1 operate area.

4. Switch On the fault and move it into the zone 1 operate area with time delay longer than the time set on tDZ timer and faster than the time set on timer tZL.

Page 202: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

189

Power swing additional logic (PSL) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Observe the operate time, which must be equal to the operate time of zone 1, after the measured impedance enters its operate area.

No delayed operation of zone 1 must be observed.

6. Configure the PSL--STPSD functional input to the PSD--START func-tional output and repeat the previous fault.

Fast trip, caused by the operation of zone 1 must appear with a time delay, which is equal to the set time delay on the timer tZL plus zone 1 normal operate time. Also observe the PSL--BLKZMH functional output signal, which must appear for a short time.

7. Be sure to establish the original configuration of the terminal and the original settings of all setting parameters.

34.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 203: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

190

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

35 Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)The test of the pulse counter function requires at least the PST Parameter Setting Tool or SPA (or LON) connection to a station HMI including corresponding functionality. A known number of pulses are with different frequency connected to the pulse counter input. The test should be performed for the settings operation = Off/On and for blocked/deblocked function. The pulse counter value is then read by the PST or station HMI.

Page 204: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

191

Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

36 Radial feeder protection (PAP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The PAP function operates in conjunction with the teleprotection scheme where received carrier signal (CR) is one condition for activating the function. This procedure does not cover the nec-essary actions to test the teleprotection channel.

The corresponding binary signals informing the operator about the operation of the unit are available in the local HMI under the menu:

ServiceReport/Functions/RadialFeederP

36.1 Testing the fast fault clearance

Procedure1. Simulate the fault conditions in one phase by suddenly lowering the

voltage below 70% of the nominal value of the terminal.

At the same time simulate the reception of a Carrier Receive (CR) signal. The fast fault clearance shall take place. If the fault is simulated on at least two phases the trip will be a three-phase trip.

36.2 Testing the delayed fault clearance

1. Disconnect the wire used for the CR signal.

2. Repeat the test according to step 1 in sub task 2 above.

Depending on selection mode, that is on the setting parameters Del1PhFltTrip, ResCurCheck, Del3PhTrip, the trip will be a single-phase or three-phase trip with or without residual current check. See the table below.

Parameter On Off

Del1PhFltTrip Single phase trip for single phase fault in time tM

Three-phase trip for single-phase fault in time tT

ResCurCheck Single-Phase trip with residual current check

Single-phase trip without residual current check

Del3PhTrip Time delayed trip for three-phase fault No time delayed trip for three-phase fault

Page 205: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

192

Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

36.3 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 206: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

193

Setting lockout (HMI) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

37 Setting lockout (HMI)

37.1 Verifying the settingsPrepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Procedure1. Configure the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input to the binary input,

which is determined by the engineering or the input that is not used by any other function.

2. Set the setting restriction to SettingRestrict = Block.

3. Connect rated DC voltage to the selected binary input.

4. Try to change the setting of any parameter for one of the functions.

Reading of the values must be possible.

The terminal must not respond to any attempt to change the setting value or configuration.

5. Disconnect the control DC voltage from the selected binary input.

6. Repeat the attempt under step 4.

The terminal must accept the changed setting value or configuration.

7. Depending on the requested design for a complete REx 5xx terminal, leave the function active or reconfigure the function into the default configuration and set the setting restriction function out of opera-tion to SettingRestrict = Open.

37.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 207: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

194

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

38 Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Check the scheme logic during the secondary injection test of the impedance or overcurrent pro-tection functions. For details see the ordering sheets for each particular REx 5xx terminal.

Activating the different zones verifies that the ZCOM-CS signal is issued from the intended zones. The ZCOM-CS signal from the independent tripping zone must have a tSendMin mini-mum time.

Check the tripping function by activating the ZCOM-CR and ZCOM-CRG inputs with the over-reaching zone used to achieve the ZCOM-CACC signal.

It is sufficient to activate the zones with only one type of fault with the secondary injection.

38.1 Testing permissive underreach

Procedure1. Activate carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal of the terminal.

2. Supply the relay with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

3. Apply a fault condition within the permissive zone.

4. Check that correct trip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained for the actual type of fault generated.

5. Check that other zones operate according to their zone timer and that the carrier send (ZCOM-CS) signal is obtained only for the zone configured to give the actual signal.

6. Deactivate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal of the terminal.

7. Check that the trip time complies with the zone timers and that cor-rect trip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained for the actual type of fault generated.

38.2 Testing permissive overreach

Procedure1. Activate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal of the terminal.

2. Supply the relay with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

3. Apply a fault condition within the permissive zone.

4. Check that correct trip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained for the actual type of fault generated.

Page 208: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

195

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Check that the other zones operate according to their zone timer and that the carrier send (ZCOM-CS) signal is obtained only for the zones that are configured to give the actual signal.

6. Deactivate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal of the terminal.

7. Supply the relay with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

8. Apply a fault condition within the permissive zone.

9. Check that trip time complies with the zone timers and that correct trip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained for the ac-tual type of fault generated.

38.3 Testing blocking scheme

Procedure1. Deactivate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal of the terminal.

2. Supply the relay with healthy conditions for at least two seconds.

3. Apply a fault condition within the forward directed zone used for scheme communication tripping.

4. Check that correct trip outputs and external signals are obtained for the type of fault generated and that the operate time complies with the tCoord timer (plus relay-measuring time).

5. Check that the other zones operate according to their zone times and that a carrier send (ZCOM-CS) signal is only obtained for the reverse zone.

6. Activate the carrier receive (ZCOM-CR) signal of the terminal.

7. Apply a fault condition in the forward directed zone used for scheme communication tripping.

8. Check that the no trip from scheme communication occurs.

9. Check that trip time from the forward directed zone used for scheme communication tripping complies with the zone timer and that cor-rect trip outputs, external signals, and indication are obtained for the actual type of fault generated.

38.4 Checking of unblocking logicCheck the unblocking function (if the function is required) when you check the communication scheme.

38.4.1 Command function with continuous unblocking (Unblock = 1)

Procedure1. Activate the carrier guard input signal (ZCOM-CRG) of the terminal.

Page 209: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

196

Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Using the scheme selected, check that a carrier accelerated trip (ZCOM-TRIP) is obtained when the carrier guard signal is deactivat-ed.

38.5 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 210: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

197

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

39 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter. Before testing the communication logic for residual overcurrent protection, the re-sidual overcurrent protection has to be tested according to the corresponding instruction. Then continue with the instructions below.

If the current reversal and weak-end-infeed logic for earth-fault protection is included, proceed with the testing according to the corresponding instruction after the test of the communication logic for residual overcurrent protection. The current reversal and weak-end-infeed functions shall be tested together with the permissive scheme.

39.1 Testing the directional comparison logic function

39.1.1 Blocking scheme

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage 3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle be-

tween voltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage.

2. Inject current (65° lagging the voltage) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

3. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the EFC logic.

Use the EFC--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

4. Compare the measured time with the set value tCoord.

5. Activate the EFC--CR binary input.

6. Check that the EFC--CRL output is activated when EFC--CR input is activated.

7. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value tCoord.

No EFC--TRIP signal should appear.

8. Switch off the fault current.

9. Reset the EFC--CR binary input.

10. Activate the EFC--BLOCK digital input.

11. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value tCoord.

No EFC--TRIP signal should appear.

12. Switch off the fault current and the polarising voltage.

Page 211: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

198

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13. Reset the EFC--BLOCK digital input.

39.1.2 Permissive scheme

Procedure1. Inject the polarising voltage 3U0 to 5% of Ub and the phase angle be-

tween voltage and current to 65°, the current lagging the voltage.

2. Inject current (65° lagging the voltage) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

3. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value tCoord.

No EFC--TRIP signal should appear, and the EFC--CS binary output should be activated.

4. Switch off the fault current.

5. Activate the EFC--CR binary input.

6. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and measure the op-erating time of the EFC logic.

Use the EFC--TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

7. Compare the measured time with the set value tCoord.

8. Activate the EFC--BLOCK digital input.

9. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting) and wait longer than the set value tCoord.

No EFC--TRIP signal should appear.

10. Switch off the fault current and the polarising voltage.

11. Reset the EFC--CR binary input and the EFC--BLOCK digital input.

39.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 212: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

199

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

40 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter

Figure 40 shows the connection of the test-set during the test of the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection. Observe that the polarizing voltage is equal to -3U0. The current inputs I5 are specially suited for the WEF1 function.

Figure 40:

Values of the logical signals belonging to the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protec-tion are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/WEF1

40.1 Measuring the operate and time limit for set values

Procedure1. Set the polarizing voltage to 1.2xUN> and the phase angle between

voltage and current to the set characteristic angle (RCA), the current lagging the voltage.

Relay test set

NI

REx5xx

IN (I4 alt I5)

L1UL2UL3U

NU

U1U2U3

NU

TRIP

Alternatives

en01000093.vsd

-3U0U4

Page 213: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

200

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Measure that the operate current of the set directional element is equal to the INcosPhi> setting.

The I Dir (I0 cos(Angle)) function activates the WEF1-START and WEF1-STFW outputs at setting ‘Forward’ and WEF1-START and WEF1-STRV outputs at setting ‘Reverse’.

3. Measure with angles ϕ = Angle +/- 45° that the measuring element op-erates when I0 cos (Angle - ϕ) =INcosPhi>.

4. Compare the result with the set value.

5. Measure the operate time of the timer by injecting a current two times the set I operate value and the polarizing voltage 1.2xUset.

6. Compare the results with the set value.

7. Decrease the polarizing voltage until WEF1-STU appears. Compare it with the set value.

8. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 214: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

201

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

41 Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Figure 41 shows the connection of the test-set during the test of the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection. Observe that the polarizing voltage is equal to -3U0. The current inputs I5 are specially suited for the WEF2 function.

Figure 41:

Values of the logical signals belonging to the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protec-tion are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/WEF2

41.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values

Procedure1. Set the polarizing voltage to 1.2xUN> and the phase angle between

voltage and current to the set characteristic angle (RCA), the current lagging the voltage.

Relay test set

NI

REx5xx

IN (I4 alt I5)

L1UL2UL3U

NU

U1U2U3

NU

TRIP

Alternatives

en01000093.vsd

-3U0U4

Page 215: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

202

Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Measure that the operate power is equal to the Iset Uset cos(Angle) setting for the set directional element.

The function activates the WEF2-START output.

3. Measure with angles ϕ = Angle +/- 45° that the measuring element op-erates when I0 U0 cos (Angle - ϕ) = Sset.

4. Compare the result with the set value.

5. Measure the operate time of the timer by injecting a current to get two times the set S operate value.

(Equation 39)

6. Compare the result with the set value.

7. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Tinv k Sref 3I0test cos ϕ( )⁄⋅= ⋅ 3U0test ⋅

Page 216: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

203

Four parameter setting groups (GRP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

42 Four parameter setting groups (GRP)

42.1 Verifying the settingsPrepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Procedure1. Check the configuration of binary inputs that control the selection of

active setting group.

2. Browse the ‘ActiveGroup’ menu to achieve information about the ac-tive setting group.

The ActiveGroup menu is located in the local HMI under:

ServiceReport/ActiveGroup

3. Connect the appropriate dc voltage to the corresponding binary in-put of the terminal and observe the information presented on the HMI display.

The displayed information must always correspond to the activated input.

4. Check that corresponding output indicates the active group.

5. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 217: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

204

Single command (CD) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

43 Single command (CD)For the single command function block, it is necessary to configure the output signal to corre-sponding binary output of the terminal. The operation of the function is then checked from the local HMI by applying the commands with the MODE Off, Steady, or Pulse and by observing the logic statuses of the corresponding binary output.

Command control functions included in the operation of different built-in functions must be test-ed at the same time as their corresponding functions.

Page 218: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

205

Stub protection (STUB) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

44 Stub protection (STUB)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

44.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

Procedure1. Check that the input logical signals STUB-BLOCK and STUB-RE-

LEASE are logical zero and note on the local HMI that the STUB-TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.

Logical signals for STUB protection are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/Stub/FunctOutputs

2. Activate the STUB-RELEASE binary input.

3. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to about 110% of the setting operating current, and switch off the cur-rent with the switch.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

4. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the STUB protection.

Use the STUB-TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer. The operation should be instantaneously.

5. Activate the STUB-BLOCK binary input.

6. Switch on the fault current (110% of the setting).

No STUB-TRIP signal should appear.

7. Switch off the fault current.

8. Reset the STUB-RELEASE binary input.

9. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in same phase to about 90% of the setting operating current, and switch off the current with the switch.

10. Switch off the fault current.

No STUB-TRIP signal should appear.

11. Switch off the fault current.

12. Reset the STUB-RELEASE binary input.

Page 219: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

206

Stub protection (STUB) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

13. Switch on the fault current.

No STUB-TRIP signal should appear.

14. Switch off the fault current.

15. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 220: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

207

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

45 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)This section contains instructions on how to test the synchro-check and energizing check for sin-gle and double CB with/without phasing function and for 1 1/2 breaker arrangements.

Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test"in this chapter.

At periodical checks, the functions should preferably be tested with the used settings. To test a specific function, it might be necessary to change some setting parameters, for example:

• AutoEnerg = On/Off/DLLB/DBLL/Both• ManEnerg = Off• Operation = Off, On• Activation of the voltage selection function if applicable

The tests explained in the test procedures below describe the settings, which can be used as ref-erences during testing before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipment to the normal or desired settings.

A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angle by regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, the phase angle meter is also needed. To per-form an accurate test of the frequency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input volt-ages is needed.

Figure 42shows the general test connection principle, which can be used during testing. This de-scription describes the test of the version intended for one bay.

Figure 43shows the general test connection for a 1 1/2 CB diameter with one-phase voltage con-nected to the line side.

Page 221: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

208

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 42: General test connection with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

Figure 43: General test connection for a 1 1/2 CB diameter with one-phase voltage connected to the line side.

U-Bus

U-Line

N

Testequipment

REx5xx

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N

Input PhaseL1,L2,L3

L12,L23,L31

UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

99000114.vsd

U-Bus

U-Line

N

Testequipment

REx5xx

U4 or U5

N

en01000168.vsd

UL1 or UL2

N

UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

Page 222: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

209

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

45.1 Testing the phasing function(Applicable only if the phasing function is included in the terminal.)

These voltage inputs are used:

The settings in table 30can be used during the test if the final setting is not determined.

Table 30: Test settings for phasing

The settings are located in the local HMI under:

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

Parameter Setting

Operation Off

InputPhase UL1

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

USelection SingleBus

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch On

ShortPulse Off

FreqDiffSynch 0.40 Hz

tPulse 0.20 s

tBreaker 0.20 s

VTConnection Line

tSync Os

FreqDiffBlock Off

Page 223: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

210

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Settings/Functions/Group n (n=1-4)/SynchroCheck/SynchroCheck1

45.1.1 Testing the frequency differenceThe frequency difference is set at 0.40 Hz on the HMI, and the test should verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiffSynch frequency difference is lower than 0.40 Hz.

Procedure1. Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b, f-line=50.0 Hz and U-Bus (U5)

= 80% U1b, f-bus=50.3 Hz.

2. Check that a closing pulse is submitted with length=0.20 seconds and at closing angle=360 * 0.20 * 0.40=29 deg.

3. Repeat with U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.5 Hz to verify that the function does not operate when freq.diff is above limit.

4. Repeat with different settings on tBreaker and FreqDiffSynch.

5. Make sure that the calculated closing angle is less than 60 deg.

6. Verify that closing command is issued at the correct phase angle when the frequency difference is less than the set value.

45.2 Testing the synchrocheckDuring test of the synchrocheck function for a single bay arrangement, these voltage inputs are used:

45.2.1At test of the synchrocheck function for a 1 1/2 CB diameter the following alternative voltage inputs can be used for the three synchrocheck functions. The voltage is selected by activation of different inputs in the voltage selection logic:

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

SYN1 U-line UL1 Activate SYN1_FD1CLD

UL2 Activate SYN1_CB2CLD

U4 Activate SYN1_CB2CLD and CB3CLD

U-bus U5 No activation of inputs necessary

SYN2 U-line UL2 Activate SYN2_FD2CLD

U4 Activate SYN2_CB3CLD

U-bus UL1 Activate SYN2_FD1CLD

Page 224: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

211

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

45.2.2 Testing the voltage differenceSet the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should check that operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than 30% U1b.

The settings in table 31can be used during the test if the final setting is not determined.

Table 31: Test settings for voltage difference (NA=Not applicable)

U5 Activate SYN2_CB1CLD

SYN3 U-line UL1 Activate SYN3_CB2CLD

UL2 Activate SYN3_FD2CLD

U5 Activate SYN3_CB1CLD and CB2CLD

U-bus U4 No activation of inputs necessary

Parameter Setting Single bay Single bay with phas-ing

Multiple bays

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

UMeasure Ph/N NA NA

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

USelection SingleBus

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off NA NA

ShortPulse Off NA NA

FreqDiffSynch 0.4 Hz NA NA

tPulse 0.2 s NA NA

tBreaker 0.2 s NA NA

VTConnection Line NA

tSync Os

FreqDiffBlock Off NA NA

Page 225: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

212

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

The settings are located in the local HMI under:

Settings/Functions/Group n (n=1-4)/SynchroCheck/SynchroCheck1

Test with UDiff = 0%1. Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b.

2. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are acti-vated.

3. The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify that the function operates within UDiff <30%.

Test with UDiff = 40%1. Increase the U-bus (U5) to 120% U1b, and the U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b.

2. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh1. Decrease the U-line (UL1) to 60% U1b and the U-bus (U5) to be equal

to 80% U1b.

2. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

Test with URatio=0.201. Run the tests under procedures "Test with UDiff = 0%", "Test with

UDiff = 40%"and "Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh"but with U-bus voltages 5 times lower.

Test with URatio=5.001. Run the tests under procedures "Test with UDiff = 0%", "Test with

UDiff = 40%"and "Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh"but with U-line voltages 5 times lower.

45.2.3 Testing the phase difference The phase difference is set at 45° on the HMI, and the test should verify that operation is achieved when the PhaseDiff (phase difference) is lower than 45°.

Set these HMI settings:

Page 226: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

213

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Table 32: Test settings for phase difference (NA=Not applicable)

Test with UDiff = 0%1. Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,

with a phase difference equal to 0° and a frequency difference that is lower than 50 mHz.

2. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are acti-vated.

The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify that the function operates for values lower than the set ones. By changing the phase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between ± 45°. The user can check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lower than 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 44.

Parameter Setting Single bay Single bay with phas-ing

Multiple bays

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

UMeasure Ph/N NA NA

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

USelection SingleBus

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off NA NA

ShortPulse Off NA NA

FreqDiffSynch 0.4 Hz NA NA

tPulse 0.2 s NA NA

tBreaker 0.2 s NA NA

VTConnection Line NA

tSync Os

FreqDiffBlock Off NA NA

Page 227: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

214

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Figure 44: Test of phase difference.

3. Apply a PhaseShift setting of 10 deg.

4. Change the phase angle between +55 and -35 and verify that the two outputs are activated for phase differences between these values but not for phase differences outside. See Figure 45.

5. Change the PhaseShift setting to 350 deg. Change the phase angle between +35 and -55 and verify as above.

Figure 45: Test of phase difference.

+45°

-45°

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

No operation

99000077.vsd

+55°

-35°

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

No operation

99000078.vsd

PhaseShift=10 degPhaseShift=350 deg

Page 228: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

215

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

45.2.4 Testing the frequency differenceThe frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the test should verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency difference is lower than 50 mHz.

Use the same HMI setting as in section 45.2.3 "Testing the phase difference".

Test with FreqDiff = 0 mHz1. Apply voltages U-Line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b and U-Bus (U5) equal

to 100% U1b, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHz and a phase difference lower than 45°.

2. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are acti-vated.

Test with FreqDiff = 1Hz1. Apply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a frequency

equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b, with a fre-quency equal to 49 Hz.

2. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

The test can be repeated with different frequency values to verify that the function operates for values lower than the set ones. If the FREJA pro-gram, Test of synchronizing relay, is used the frequency can be changed continuously.

45.2.5 Testing the reference voltage

1. Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 42.

The UDiff between the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, so that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are acti-vated first.

2. Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing the setting on the HMI.

3. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

4. The test can also be repeated by moving the U-line voltage to the UL3 input.

Note!A frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase difference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs might NOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within set limits, because the phase difference is not stable!

Page 229: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

216

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

45.3 Testing the energizing checkDuring test of the energizing check function for a single bay arrangement, these voltage inputs are used:

45.3.1At test of the energizing check function for a 1 1/2 CB diameter the following alternative voltage inputs can be used for the three energizing check functions. The voltage is selected by activation of different inputs in the voltage selection logic:

45.3.2 Testing the dead line live bus (DLLB)The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low voltage on the U-Line and for a high voltage on the U-bus. This corresponds to an energizing of a dead line to a live bus.

The settings in table 33can be used during the test if the final setting is not determined.

Table 33: Test settings for DLLB (NA=Not applicable)

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

SYN1 U-line UL1 Activate SYN1_FD1CLD and UF1OK

UL2 Activate SYN1_CB2CLD and UF2OK

U4 Activate SYN1_CB2CLD, CB3CLD and UB2OK

U-bus U5 Activate SYN1_UB1OK

SYN2 U-line UL2 Activate SYN2_FD2CLD and UF2OK

U4 Activate SYN2_CB3CLD and UB2OK

U-bus UL1 Activate SYN2_FD1CLD and UF1OK

U5 Activate SYN2_CB1CLD and UB1OK

SYN3 U-line UL1 Activate SYN3_CB2CLD and UF1OK

UL2 Activate SYN3_FD2CLD and UF2OK

U5 Activate SYN3_CB1CLD, CB2CLD and UB1OK

U-bus U4 Activate SYN3_UB2OK

Parameter Setting Single bay Single bay with phas-ing

Multiple bays

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

UMeasure Ph/N NA NA

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

Page 230: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

217

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

1. Apply a single-phase voltage 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5), and a sin-gle-phase voltage 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1).

2. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are acti-vated.

3. Increase the U-Line (UL1) to 60% U1b and U-Bus(U5) to be equal to 100% U1b. The outputs should NOT be activated.

The test can be repeated with different values on the U-Bus and the U-Line.

45.3.3 Testing the dead bus live line (DBLL)The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low voltage on the U-bus and for a high one on the U-line. This corresponds to an energizing of a dead bus from a live line.

1. Change the HMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a sin-gle-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).

USelection SingleBus

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off NA NA

ShortPulse Off NA NA

FreqDiffSynch 0.4 Hz NA NA

tPulse 0.2 s NA NA

tBreaker 0.2 s NA NA

VTConnection Line NA

tSync Os

FreqDiffBlock Off NA NA

Parameter Setting Single bay Single bay with phas-ing

Multiple bays

Page 231: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

218

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

3. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are acti-vated.

4. Decrease the U-line to 60% U1b and keep the U-bus equal to 30% U1b.

The outputs should NOT be activated.

5. The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

45.3.4 Testing both directions (DLLB or DBLL)

1. Change the HMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to Both.

2. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and a single-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).

3. Check that the “SYN1-AUTOOK” and “SYN1-MANOK” outputs are activated.

4. Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100% U1b and the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.

The outputs should still be activated.

5. The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

6. Restore the equipment to normal or desired settings.

45.3.5 Testing the dead bus dead line (DBDL)The test should verify that the energizing function operates for a low voltage on both the U-bus the U-line, i.e closing of the breaker in a non energised system.

1. Set AutoEnerg to Off and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2. Set ManDBDL to On.

3. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a sin-gle-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1).

4. Check that the SYN1-MANOK output is activated.

5. Increase the U-bus to 80% U1b and keep the U-line equal to 30% U1b.

The outputs should NOT be activated.

6. Repeat the test with ManEnerg set to DLLB and Both, and different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

Page 232: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

219

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

45.4 Testing the voltage selectionThe settings in table 34can be used during the test if the final setting is not determined.

Table 34: Test settings for voltage selection (NA=Not applicable)

45.4.1 Testing the voltage selection for single CB arrangementsThis test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the measurement in the energizing function used in a double-bus arrangement. Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and a single-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).

If the SYN1-UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, normally they must be activated, thus activated and deactivated must be inverted in the description of tests below.

1. Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs.

Parameter Setting Single bay Single bay with phas-ing

Multiple bays

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

UMeasure Ph/N NA NA

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

USelection DbleB

AutoEnerg Both

ManEnerg Both

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off NA NA

ShortPulse Off NA NA

FreqDiffSynch 0.4 Hz NA NA

tPulse 0.2 s NA NA

tBreaker 0.2 s NA NA

VTConnection Line NA

tSync Os

FreqDiffBlock Off NA NA

Page 233: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

220

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Apply signals according to the tables and verify that correct output signals are generated.

Table 35: Voltages

Table 36: Binary inputs

Table 37: Binary outputs

45.4.2 Testing the voltage selection for 1 1/2 circuit breaker diameterThis test should verify that correct voltage is selected for the measurement in the energizing function used for a diameter in a one and a half breaker arrangement. Apply single-phase volt-ages to the inputs according to the tables below. “H” means a voltage of 100% U1b and “L” means a voltage of 30% U1b. Verify that correct output signals are generated.

1. Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs.

2. Apply signals according to the tables and verify that correct output signals are generated.

Signal

Voltage from bus1 U5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Voltage from bus2 U4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Signal

CB1OPEN 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

CB1CLD 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

CB2OPEN 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

CB2CLD 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

UB1FF 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

UB2FF 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

VTSU 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Signal

AUTOOK 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

MANOK 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

VSUB1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

VSUB2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Page 234: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

221

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

Table 38: Voltage to input

Table 39: Binary inputs SYN1, SYN2 and SYN3

Table 40: Binary outputs SYN1, SYN2, SYN3

45.5 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Signal SYN1 SYN2 SYN3

BUS1 U5 H H H H H H - - H L H H H H H H

BUS2 U4 - - - - H L - - H H - - - - H L

LINE1 UL1 H L - - - - H L - - H L - - - -

LINE2 UL2 - - H L - - H H - - - - H L - -

Signal SYN1 SYN2 SYN3

FD1CLD 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

FD1OPEN 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

FD2CLD 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

FD2OPEN 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

CB1CLD - - - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CB1OPEN - - - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CB2CLD 0 0 1 1 0 0 - - - - 0 0 1 1 0 0

CB2OPEN 1 1 0 0 1 1 - - - - 1 1 0 0 1 1

CB3CLD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - -

CB3OPEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - - - -

Signal SYN1 SYN2 SYN3

VSUF1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

VSUF2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

VSUB1 - - - - - - 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

VSUB2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 - - - - - -

AUTOOK 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Page 235: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

222

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

46 Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Check that the input logical signal THOL-BLOCK is logical zero and note on the local HMI that the logical signal THOL-TRIP, THOL-START and THOL-ALARM are equal to the logical 0. Logical signals for thermal overload protection are available under menu tree:

ServiceReport/Functions/ThermOverLoad/FuncOutputs

46.1 Measuring the operate and time limit of set values

46.1.1 Testing the protection without external temperature compensation (NonComp)

Procedure1. Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in one phase to

about 300% of I1b (to minimise the trip time), and switch off the cur-rent.

2. Reset the thermal memory under menu tree:

Test/ThermReset

3. Switch on the fault current and read the presented temperature:

ServiceReport/Functions/ThermOverload/ThermOverload/T Line

4. Check the Alarm limit (TAlarm) during injection.

Measure the signal THOL-ALARM until it appears on the corresponding binary output or on the local HMI unit.

5. Compare the measured temperature with the setting.

6. Measure the trip time of the THOL protection.

Use the THOL-TRIP signal from the configured binary output to stop the timer.

7. Take the “T Line” readings.

Compare with the setting of TTrip.

8. Activate the THOL-BLOCK binary input.

The signals THOL-ALARM, THOL-START and THOL-TRIP should disappear.

9. Reset the THOL-BLOCK binary input.

Page 236: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

223

Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

10. Check the reset limit (TdReset).

Measure the signal THOL-START until it disappears on the correspond-ing binary output or on the local HMI unit, take the “T Line” readings and compare with the setting of TdReset.

11. Compare the measured trip time with the setting according to the formula.

12. Reset the thermal memory.

13. Continue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 237: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

224

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

47 Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:

• One for a phase-to-earth fault

Ensure that the maximum continuous current of the terminal does not exceed four times its rated value.

47.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

47.1.1 Time delayed phase overcurrent

Procedure1. Inject a phase current in the terminal with start below the setting val-

ue.

2. Increase the injected current (measured current) in the Ln phase un-til the starting signal TOC--STLn (n=1-3) appears.

3. Switch off the fault current.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

4. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IP>.

5. Set the fault current to about 1.5 times the measured operating cur-rent.

6. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the TOC protection. Use the TOC--TRP signal.

7. Compare the measured time with the set value tP.

47.1.2 Time delayed residual overcurrent (non-dir.)

Procedure1. Inject a phase current in the terminal with start below the setting val-

ue.

2. Increase the injected residual current (measured current) in the Ln phase until the starting signal TOC--STN appears.

3. Switch off the fault current.

Observe the maximum permitted overloading of the current circuits in the terminal.

Page 238: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

225

Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4. Compare the measured operating current with the set value IN>.

5. Set the fault current to about 1.5 times the measured operating cur-rent.

6. Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of the TOC protection. Use the TOC--TRN signal.

7. Compare the measured time with the set value tN.

47.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 239: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

226

Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

48 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

To verify the settings the following fault types should be tested:

• One for a single-phase voltage feeding.

48.1 Verifying the settings

48.1.1 Time delayed phase overvoltage protection

Procedure1. Apply the single phase voltage with start below the setting value.

2. Slowly increase the voltage until the TOV--STPE signal appears.

3. Note the operate value and compare it with the set value.

4. Switch off the applied voltage.

5. Set and apply about 20% higher voltage than the measured operate value for one-phase.

6. Measure the time delay for the TOV--TRPE signal and compare it with the set value.

48.1.2 Time delayed residual overvoltage protection (non-dir.)

Procedure1. Apply the single phase voltage with start below the setting value.

2. Slowly increase the voltage until the STN appears.

3. Note the operate value and compare it with the set value.

4. Switch off the applied voltage.

5. Set and apply about 20% higher voltage than the measured operate value for one-phase.

6. Measure the time delay for the TOV--TRN signal and compare it with the set value.

48.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 240: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

227

Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

49 Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:

• Decrease of voltage in one phase

49.1 Verifying the settings

Procedure1. Supply the terminal with three-phase voltages to their rated values.

2. Slowly decrease the voltage in one of the phases, until the TUV-START signal appears.

3. Note the operate value and compare it with the set value.

4. Increase the measured voltage to rated operate conditions.

5. Instantaneously decrease the voltage in one-phase to a value about 20% lower than the measured operate value.

6. Measure the time delay for the TUV-TRIP signal, and compare it with the set value.

49.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 241: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

228

Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

50 Tripping logic (TR)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

The function is tested functionally together with other protection functions (distance protection ZMn--, line differential protection DIFL-, earth-fault overcurrent protection IOC-- or TOC--, etc.) within the REx 5xx terminals. It is recommended to test the function together with the au-toreclosing function, when built into the terminal or when a separate external unit is used for the reclosing purposes.

50.1 3ph operating modeThe function must issue a three-phase trip in all cases, when trip is initiated by any protection or some other built-in or external function. The following functional output signals must always appear simultaneously: TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TRL1, TRIP-TRL2, TRIP-TRL3 and TRIP-TR3P.

50.2 1ph/3ph operating modeThe following tests should be carried out in addition to some other tests, which depends on the complete configuration of a terminal:

Procedure1. Initiate one-by one different single-phase-to-earth faults.

Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a re-claim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a sin-gle-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one of the trip outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR1P should be active at each fault. No other out-puts should be active.

2. Initiate different phase-to-phase and three-phase faults.

Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a re-claim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a three-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and all of the trip outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR3P should be active at each fault. No other out-puts should be active.

3. Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the same fault once again within the reclaim time of the used autore-closing function.

A three-phase trip must be initiated for the second fault.

Check that the corresponding trip signals appear after both faults.

Page 242: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

229

Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

If not the autoreclosing function is used the functional outputs TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TR1P and the corresponding phase signal (TRIP-TRLn) should be active at each fault.

4. Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in one of the remaining phas-es within the time interval, shorter than two seconds and shorter than the dead-time of the autoreclosing function, when included in protection scheme.

Check that the second trip is a three-phase trip.

50.3 1ph/2ph/3ph operating modeThe following tests should be carried out in addition to some other tests, which depends on the complete configuration of a terminal:

Procedure1. Initiate one-by one different single-phase-to-earth faults.

Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a re-claim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a sin-gle-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one of the trip outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR1P should be active at each fault. No other out-puts should be active.

2. Initiate one-by one different phase-to-phase faults.

Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a re-claim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a two-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only correspond-ing two trip outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Func-tional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR2P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

3. Initiate a three-phase fault.

Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a re-claim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a three-phase trip should occur for the fault and all trip outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at the same time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR3P should be active at each fault. No other out-puts should be active.

4. Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the same fault once again within the reclaim time of the used autore-closing function.

A three-phase trip must be initiated for the second fault.

Check that the corresponding trip signals appear after both faults.

Page 243: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

230

Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

If not the autoreclosing function is used the functional outputs TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TR1P and the corresponding phase signal (TRIP-TRLn) should be active at each fault.

5. Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Initiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in one of the remaining phas-es within the time interval, shorter than two seconds and shorter than the dead-time of the autoreclosing function, when included in protection scheme.

Check that the second trip is a single-phase trip in a second initiated phase.

6. Initiate a phase-to-phase fault and switch it off immediately when the trip signal is issued for the corresponding two phases. Initiate anoth-er phase-to-phase fault (not between the same phases) within the time, shorter than 2 seconds.

Check, that the output signals, issued for the first fault, correspond to two-phase trip for included phases.

The output signals for the second fault must correspond to the three-phase tripping action.

50.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 244: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

231

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

51 Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Consider to apply an three-phase symmetrical voltage at rated value and ZΦ=0° if the settings are directional. If distance protection (ZMn) not are included in the terminal test of directional lines has to be carried out.

Ensure that the maximum continuos current of a terminal does not exceed four times its rated value, if the measurement of the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage condi-tions.

To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:

• One for a phase-to-earth fault

51.1 Measuring the operate and time limit for set values

51.1.1 Measuring the operate limit of the low step overcurrent protection

Procedure1. Inject a phase current slightly smaller than the functional value

I>Low.

2. Increase the current slowly and check the function value by observ-ing when the signal TOC3-STNDLS appears.

3. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.

51.1.2 Measuring the definite time delay of the low set stage

1. Set a current 1.5 times I>Low on the injection test equipment and three-phase symmetrical voltage if directional.

2. Switch the current on and compare the operation time on TOC3-TRLS with the set value tLow.

The operate time shall be tRelay+tLow.

51.1.3 Measuring the inverse time delay of the low set stage

1. Set temporarily tLow = 0.000 s.

If I>Low is set higher than I>Inv, check that there is no trip signal TOC3-TRLS when the current is less than I>Low.

Page 245: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

232

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Check the time delay at two points of the inverse time curve.

Check with the current I>Low or 2·I>Inv (the highest value of these two) and the current that according to the inverse time curve corresponds to tMin.

3. Increase the current 10% and check that the operation time is equal to tMin.

4. Set tLow to the correct value and check with a high current that the operation time is equal to tMin+tLow.

51.1.4 Measuring the operate limit of the high step overcurrent protection

1. Set temporarily tHigh=0.000 s.

2. Inject a phase current slightly smaller than the operation value I>High and three-phase symmetrical voltage if directional.

3. Increase the current slowly and check the operation value by observ-ing when the signal TOC3-TRHS appears.

4. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.

5. Set tHigh to the correct value.

6. Set a current 1.5 times I>High on the injection test equipment

7. Switch the current on and compare the operation time with the set value tHigh.

51.1.5 Measuring the operate limit of the directional lines.

Figure 46: Definitions for forward and reverse directions

Procedure1. Inject a current 1.2 times I>Low and a three-phase symmetrical volt-

age.

X

R

X

R

Forward

Reverse

ArgDir

ArgDirArgNegRes

ArgNegRes

en01000118.vsd

Page 246: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

233

Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

2. Slowly decrease the impedance angle to find the operating value ac-cording to figure 46.

3. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.

51.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off.

Page 247: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

234

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

52 Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)Prepare the terminal for test as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

Ensure that the maximum continuos current of a terminal does not exceed four times its rated value, if the measurement od the operating characteristics runs under constant voltage condi-tions.

To verify the settings the following fault type should be tested:

• One for a phase-to-earth fault

52.1 Measuring the operate and time limit for set values

52.1.1 Measuring the operate limit of the low step overcurrent protection

Procedure1. Inject a phase current slightly smaller than the functional value

I>Low.

2. Increase the current slowly and check the function value by observ-ing when the signal TOC2-STLS appears.

3. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.

52.1.2 Measuring the definite time delay of the low set stage

Procedure1. Set a current 1.5 times I>Low on the injection test equipment.

2. Switch the current on and compare the operation time on TOC2-TRLS with the set value tLow.

The operate time shall be tLow+operate time of the low set stage.

52.1.3 Measuring the inverse time delay of the low set stage

Procedure1. Set temporarily tLow = 0.000 s.

If I>Low is set higher than I>Inv, check that there is no trip signal TOC2-TRLS when the current is less than I>Low.

2. Check the time delay at two points of the inverse time curve.

Check with the current I>Low or 2·I>Inv (the highest value of these two) and the current that according to the inverse time curve corresponds to tMin.

3. Increase the current 10% and check that the operation time is equal to tMin.

Page 248: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

235

Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

4. Set tLow to the correct value and check with a high current that the operation time is equal to tMin+tLow.

52.1.4 Measuring the operate limit of the high step overcurrent protection

1. Set temporarily tHigh=0.000 s.

2. Inject a phase current slightly smaller than the operation value I>High.

3. Increase the current slowly and check the operation value by observ-ing when the signal TOC2-TRHS appears.

4. Compare the result of the measurement with the set value.

5. Set tHigh to the correct value.

6. Set a current 1.5 times I>High on the injection test equipment

7. Switch the current on and compare the operation time with the set value tHigh.

52.2 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode to off. Restore connections and settings to the original values, if they were changed for testing purpose.

Page 249: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

236

Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

53 Low active power protection (LAPP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

53.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

53.1.1 Low active power in any phaseThe function will be blocked if any phase-voltage is below 10 % of Ur or any phase-current is below 5 % of Ir .

53.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rated secondary

voltage.

2. Inject a three-phase balanced current, that corresponds to an active power well above the set values of Plow < and Phight<. The direction of the current (in phase with the voltage or in phase-opposition to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to Zero, the current should be in phase with the voltage.

3. Measure the active power that corresponds to a single phase-volt-age and the correspoinding single phase-current, with an external device.

4. Activate the LAPP_CR binary input.

5. Slowly reduce the current in the selected phase until the start signal LAPP_STLOW appears.

6. Compare the measured active power with the set value Phigh<.

7. Continue to slowly decrease the current in the selected phase until the start signal LAPP_STLOW appears.

8. Compare the measured active power with the set value Plow<.

9. Repeat item 1-8 for the other two phases.

10. Repeat item 1-9 with voltages lower than nominal.

11. Repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within 90°, around what was originally selected under item 2.

12. If DirOper is set to zero, repeat item 1-10, with the current phase an-gle varied within (+90° to +180°), around what was originally selected under item 2, and make sure that the start signals appear.

Page 250: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

237

Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

53.1.3 Security test with respect to directionality

Procedure1. If DirOper is set to zero, go directly to item 14. If Dir Oper is set to 1,

repeat item 1-10 with teh current phase angle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2, and make sure that no start signal appears.

53.1.4 Time delay test

Procedure1. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-

ed secondary voltage.

2. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to an active power between the set values of Plow < and Phigh<. The direction of the current (in phase with the voltage or in phase-opposition to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be in phase with the voltage.

3. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the LAPP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set val-ue tHigh.

4. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to an active power between the set value of Plow < and 5 % of Inom. The direction of the current (in phase with the voltage or in phase-opposition to te voltage) should be in phase with the voltage.

5. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the LAPP function. Use the LAPP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

53.1.5 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 251: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

238

Low active and reactiv power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

54 Low active and reactiv power protection (LARP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

54.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

54.1.1 Low active and reactive power in any phaseThe function will be blocked if any phase-voltage is below 10% of Ur or any phase-current is below 5% of Ir .

54.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rated secondary

voltage.

2. Inject a three-phase balanced current, that corresponds to a pure re-active power well above the set values of Qlow< and Qhigh<. The di-rection of the current (90 degrees leading or lagging with respect to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be lagging the voltage by 90°.

3. Measure the reactive power that corresponds to a single phase-volt-age and the corresponding single phase-current, with an external device.

4. Activate the LARP_CR binary input.

5. Slowly reduce the current in the selected phase until the start signal LARP_STHIGH appears.

6. Compare the measured reactive power with the set value Qhigh<.

7. Continue to slowly decrease the current in the selected phase until the start signal LARP_STLOW appears.

8. Compare the measured reactive power with the set value Qlow<.

9. Repeat item 1-8 for the other two phases.

10. Repeat item 1-9 with voltages lower than nominal.

11. Repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within 90°, around what was originally selected under item 2. Measure both ac-tive and reactive power under item 3.The measured reactive power under item 6 should now becompared to: (Qhigh<) + (the absolute value of the measured active power)*tan(k). The measured reactive power under item 8 should now be compared to: (Qlow<) + (the ab-solute value of the measured active power)*tan(k).

Page 252: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

239

Low active and reactiv power protection (LARP)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

12. If DirOper is set to zero, repeat item 1-10, with the current phase an-gle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2. Measure both active and reactive power under item 3. The measured reactive power under item 6 should now be compared to: (Qhigh<) + (the absolute value of the measured active power)*tan(k). The measured reactive power under item 8 should now be compared to: (Qlow<) + (the absolute value of the measured active power)*tan(k).

54.1.3 Security test with respect to directionality

Procedure1. If DirOper is set to zero, go directly to item 14. If DirOper is set to 1,

repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2, and make sure that no start signal appears.

54.1.4 Time delay test

Procedure1. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-

ed secondary voltage.

2. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to a reactive power between the set values of Qlow< and Qhigh<. The direction of the current (90 degrees leading or lagging with respect to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the set-ting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be lagging the voltage by 90°.

3. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the LARP function. Use the LARP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.

4. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-ed secondary voltage.

5. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to a reactive power between the set value of Qlow< and 5% of Inom. The direction of the current (90 degrees leading or lagging with respect to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the set-ting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be lagging the voltage by 90°.

6. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the LARP function. Use the LARP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

Page 253: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

240

High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

55 High active power protection (HAPP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

55.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

55.1.1 High active power in any phaseThe function will be blocked if any phase-voltage is below 10% of Ur or any phase-current is below 5% of Ir .

55.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rated secondary

voltage.

2. Inject a three-phase balanced current, that corresponds to an active power well below the set values of Plow> and Phigh>. The direction of the current (in phase with the voltage or in phase-opposition to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be in phase with the voltage.

3. Measure the active power that corresponds to a single phase-volt-age and the corresponding single phase-current, with an external device.

4. Activate the HAPP_CR binary input.

5. Slowly increase the current in the selected phase until the start sig-nal HAPP_STLOW appears.

6. Compare the measured active power with the set value Plow>.

7. Continue to slowly increase the current in the selected phase until the start signal LAPP_STHIGH appears.

8. Compare the measured active power with the set value Phigh>.

9. Repeat item 1-8 for the other two phases.

10. Repeat item 1-9 with voltages higher and lower than nominal.

11. Repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within 90°, around what was originally selected under item 2.

12. If DirOper is set to zero, repeat item 1-10, with the current phase an-gle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2, and make sure that the start signals appear.

Page 254: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

241

High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

55.1.3 Security test with respect to directionality

Procedure1. If DirOper is set to zero, go directly to item 14. If DirOper is set to 1,

repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2, and make sure that no start signal appears.

55.1.4 Time delay test

Procedure1. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-

ed secondary voltage.

2. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to an active power well above the set value of Phigh>. The direction of the current (in phase with the voltage or in phase-oppo-sition to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the HAPP function. Use the HAPP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.current should be in phase with the voltage.

3. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the HAPP function. Use the HAPP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.

4. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-ed secondary voltage.

5. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to an active power between the set values of Plow> and Phigh>. The direction of the current (in phase with the voltage or in phase-opposition to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be in phase with the voltage.

6. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the HAPP function. Use the HAPP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

Page 255: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

242

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

56 High active and reactive power protection (HARP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

56.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

56.1.1 High active and reactive power in any phaseThe function will be blocked if any phase-voltage is below 10% of Ur or any phase-current is below 5% of Ir .

56.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rated secondary

voltage.

2. Inject a three-phase balanced current, that corresponds to a pure re-active power well below the set values of Qlow> and Qhigh>. The di-rection of the current (90 degrees leading or lagging with respect to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be lagging the voltage by 90°.

3. Measure the reactive power that corresponds to a single phase-volt-age and the corresponding single phase-current, with an external device.

4. Activate the HARP_CR binary input.

5. Slowly increase the current in the selected phase until the start sig-nal HARP_STLOW appears.

6. Compare the measured reactive power with the set value Qlow>.

7. Continue to slowly increase the current in the selected phase until the start signal HARP_STHIGH appears.

8. Compare the measured reactive power with the set value Qhigh>.

9. Repeat item 1-8 for the other two phases.

10. Repeat item 1-9 with voltages higher and lower than the nominal.

11. Repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within 90°, around what was originally selected under item 2. Measure both ac-tive and reactive power under item 3. The measured reactive power under item 6 should now be compared to: (Qlow>) + (the absolute value of the measured active power)*tan(k). The measured reactive power under item 8 should now be compared to: (Qhigh>) + (the ab-solute value of the measured active power)*tan(k).

Page 256: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

243

High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

12. If DirOper is set to zero, repeat item 1-10, with the current phase an-gle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2. Measure both active and reactive power under item 3. The measured reactive power under item 6 should now be compared to: (Qlow>) + (the absolute value of the measured active power)*tan(k). The measured reactive power under item 8 should now be compared to: (Qhigh>) + (the absolute value of the measured active power)*tan(k)

56.1.3 Security test with respect to directionality

Procedure1. If DirOper is set to zero, go directly to item 14. If DirOper is set to 1,

repeat item 1-10 with the current phase angle varied within (+90° to +180°) and (-90° to -180°), around what was originally selected under item 2, and make sure that no start signal appears.

56.1.4 Time delay test

Procedure1. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-

ed secondary voltage.

2. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to a reactive power well above the set value Qhigh>. The di-rection of the current (90 degrees leading or lagging with respect to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the setting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be lagging the voltage by 90°.

3. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the HARP function. Use the HARP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.

4. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rat-ed secondary voltage

5. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced current, that corre-sponds to a reactive power between the set values of Qlow> and Qhigh>. The direction of the current (90 degrees leading or lagging with respect to the voltage) should be chosen with respect to the set-ting of DirOper, DirLow and DirHigh. If DirOper is set to 1 and DirLow (and DirHigh) is set to zero, the current should be lagging the voltage by 90°.

6. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the HARP function. Use the HARP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

Page 257: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

244

Sudden change in phase current protection (SCC1)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

57 Sudden change in phase current protection (SCC1)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

57.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

57.1.1 Sudden change in current in any phaseThe sudden change in current protection algorithm measures the difference in amplitude of the current between two consecutive periods, and compares this difference to a set value.

57.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current.

2. Measure the current that corresponds to a single phase, with an ex-ternal device.

3. Activate the SCC1_CR binary input.

4. Make a rapid small positive step-change of the current in the select-ed phase.

5. Check if the SCC1_START (or SCC1_TRIP) signal appears.

6. Compare the measured change in current with the set value DIL>.

7. Repeat item 4-6, with successively increased step-size, until the SCC1_START (or SCC1_TRIP) signal appears.

8. Repeat item 1-7, with a lower/higher current in item 1.

9. Repeat item 1-8, with a negative step-change in item 4.

10. Repeat item 1-9 for the other two phases.

57.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current.

2. Prepare measurement of the time between the sudden change in cur-rent and the appearance of the SCC1_START (SCC1_TRIP) signal.

3. Activate the SCC1_CR binary input.

4. Make a rapid step-change of the current, significantly larger than the set value DIL>, in the selected phase.

Page 258: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

245

Sudden change in phase current protection (SCC1)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Measure the time between the change in current and the SCC1_START (SCC1_TRIP) signal.

6. Compare the measured time with the set values tHStart and tHTrip.

7. Repeat item 11-16 for the other two phases.

57.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 259: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

246

Sudden change in residual current protection (SCRC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

58 Sudden change in residual current protection (SCRC)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

58.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

58.1.1 Sudden change in residual currentThe sudden change in residual current protection algorithm measures the difference in amplitude of the residual current between two consecutive periods, and compares this difference to a set value.

58.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current, and add a small residual current.

2. Measure the residual current, with an external device.

3. Activate the SCRC_CR binary input.

4. Make a rapid small positive step-change of the residual current.

5. Check if the SCRC_START (or SCRC_TRIP) signal appears.

6. Compare the measured change in residual current with the set value DIN>.

7. Repeat item 4-6, with successively increased step-size, until thRe-peat item 1-7, with a lower/higher balanced current in item 1.Repeat item 1-7, with a lower/higher balanced current in item 1.

8. Repeat item 1-8, with a larger residual current in item 1.

9. Repeat item 1-9, with a negative step-change in item 4.

58.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current, and add a residual current.

2. Prepare measurement of the time between the sudden change in re-sidual current and the appearance of the SCRC_START (SCRC_TRIP) signal.

3. Activate the SCRC_CR binary input.

4. Make a rapid step-change of the residual current, significantly larger than the set value DIN>.

Page 260: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

247

Sudden change in residual current protection (SCRC)

Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

5. Measure the time between the change in residual current and the SCRC_START (SCRC_TRIP) signal.

6. Compare the measured time with the set values tHStart and tHTrip.

58.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 261: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

248

Sudden change in voltage protection (SCV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

59 Sudden change in voltage protection (SCV) Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

59.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

59.1.1 Sudden change in voltage in any phaseThe sudden change in voltage protection algorithm measures the difference in amplitude of the voltage between two consecutive periods, and compares this difference to a set value.

59.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Apply a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rated secondary

voltage.

2. Measure the voltage that corresponds to a single phase, with an ex-ternal device.

3. Activate the SCV_CR binary input.

4. Make a rapid small positive step-change of the voltage in the select-ed phase.

5. Check if the SCV_START (or SCV_TRIP) signal appears.

6. Compare the measured change in voltage with the set value DUL>.

7. Repeat item 4-6, with successively increased step-size, until the SCV_START (or SCV_TRIP) signal appears.

8. Repeat item 1-7, with a lower/higher voltage in item 1.

9. Repeat item 1-8, with a negative step-change in item 4.

10. Repeat item 1-9 for the other two phases.

59.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Apply a three-phase balanced voltage, close to the rated secondary

voltage.

2. Prepare measurement of the time between the sudden change in voltage and the appearance of the SCV_START (SCV_TRIP) signal.

3. Activate the SCV_CR binary input.

4. Make a rapid step-change of the voltage, significantly larger than the set value DUL>, in the selected phase.

5. Measure the time between the change in voltage and the SCV_START (SCV_TRIP) signal.

Page 262: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

249

Sudden change in voltage protection (SCV) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

6. Compare the measured time with the set values tHStart and tHTrip.

7. Repeat item 11-16 for the other two phases.

59.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 263: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

250

Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

60 Overvoltage protection (OVP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

60.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

60.1.1 Overvoltage in any phaseThis overvoltage function measures the voltage with a very high accuracy (within 1%).

60.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Apply a three-phase balanced voltage, well below the set values of

ULLow> and ULHigh>.

2. Measure the voltage that corresponds to a single phase-voltage, with an external device.

3. Activate the OVP_CR binary input.

4. Slowly increase the voltage in the selected phase until the start sig-nal OVP_STLOW appears.

5. Compare the measured voltage with the set value ULLow>.

6. Continue to slowly increase the voltage in the selected phase until the start signal OVP_STHIGH appears.

7. Compare the measured voltage with the set value ULHigh>.

8. Repeat item 1-7 for the other two phases.

60.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, well above the

set values of ULLow> and ULHigh>.

2. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the OVP function. Use the OVP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.

3. Prepare injection of a three-phase balanced voltage, between the set values of ULLow> and ULHigh>.

4. Switch on the injection and measure the operating time of the OVP function. Use the OVP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

60.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 264: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

251

Undercurrent protection (UCP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

61 Undercurrent protection (UCP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

61.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

61.1.1 Undercurrent in any phase

61.1.2 Dependbility test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current.

2. Measure the the current in a single phase, with an external device.

3. Activate the UCP_CR binary input.

4. Slowly reduce the current in the selected phase until the start signal UCP_STHIGH appears

5. Compare the measured current with the set value ILHigh<.

6. Continue to slowly decrease the current in the selected phase until the start signal UCP_STLOW appears.

7. Compare the measured current with the set value ILLow<.

8. Repeat item 1-7 for the other two phases.

61.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current. Prepare for a change of the injected current to a value be-tween the set values ILLow< and ILHigh<.

2. Change the level of the injected current and measure the operating time of the UCP function. Use the UCP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.

3. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary current. Prepare for a change of the injected current to a value well below the set value ILLow.

4. Change the level of the injected current and measure the operating time of the UCP function. Use the UCP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

61.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 265: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

252

Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

62 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

62.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

62.1.1 Overcurrent in any phase

62.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a small three-phase balanced current.

2. Measure the current in a single phase, with an external decvice.

3. Activate the OCP_CR binary input.

4. Slowly increase the current in the selected phase until the start sig-nal OCP_STLOW appears

5. Compare the measured current with the set value ILLow>.

6. Continue to slowly increase the current in the selected phase until the start signal OCP_STHIGH appears.

7. Compare the measured current with the set value ILHigh>.

8. Repeat item 1-7 for the other two phases.

62.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Inject a small three-phase balanced current. Prepare for a change of

the injected current to a value between the set values ILLow> and IL-High>.

2. Change the level of the injected current and measure the operating time of the OCP function. Use the OCP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

3. Inject a small three-phase balanced current. Prepare for a change of the injected current to a value well above the set value ILHigh>.

4. Change the level of the injected current and measure the operating time of the OCP function. Use the OCP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh.

62.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 266: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

253

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

63 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)Prepare the terminal for verification of settings as outlined in section 2 "Preparing for test" in this chapter.

63.1 Measuring the operate limit of set values

63.1.1 Residual overcurrentThe residual overcurrent protection algorithm measures the amplitude of the residual current and compares with the set value.

63.1.2 Dependability test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current, and add a small residual current.

2. Measure the residual current, with an external device.

3. Acivate the ROCP_CR binary input.

4. Slowly increase the residual current until the start signal ROCP_STLOW appears.

5. Compare the measured residual current with the set value INLow>.

6. Continue to slowly increase the residual current until the start signal ROCP_STHIGH appears.

7. Compare the measured residual current with the set value INHigh>.

8. Repeat item 1-7, with a lower/higher balanced current in item 1.

63.1.3 Time delay test

Procedure1. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary

current, and add a small residual current

2. Prepare for a change of the injected residual current to a value be-tween the set values INLow> and INHigh>.

3. Change the level of the injected residual current and measure the op-erating time of the ROCP function. Use the ROCP_TRLOW signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tLow.

4. Inject a three-phase balanced current, close to the rated secondary current, and add a small residual current

5. Prepare for a change of the injected residual current to a value well above the set value INHigh>.

Page 267: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

254

Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) Chapter 13Verifying settings by secondary

injection

6. Change the level of the injected current and measure the operating time of the ROCP function. Use the ROCP_TRHIGH signal. Compare this operating time with the set value tHigh

63.1.4 Completing the testContinue to test another function or complete the test by setting the test mode off.

Page 268: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

255

About this chapter Chapter 14Verifying the internal configuration

Chapter 14 Verifying the internal configuration

About this chapterThe aim of this chapter is to verify that the internal communications and output signals are ac-cording to the specification and normal protection praxis. This means that all included protection functions must be in operation.

Page 269: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

256

Overview Chapter 14Verifying the internal configuration

1 OverviewBefore start of this process, all individual devices that are involved in the fault clearance process must have been tested as individuals and set in operation. The breaker must be ready for an open-close-open cycle.

The shaping of the test process is dependent on the complexity of the design of the switchyard. Hereby follows some items which could be used as guidelines.

Page 270: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

257

Testing the interaction of the distance protection

Chapter 14Verifying the internal configuration

2 Testing the interaction of the distance protectionThis procedure describes how to test the interaction of the distance protection zone 1 at phase L1-earth fault in forward direction. It is recommended that all other distance protection zones and other protection functions are tested in a similar way. The test must be done without the test switch in order to verify the interaction between the terminal and surrounding equipment. Make sure that all personnel is informed, also in remote station.

Procedure1. Make sure that the protection terminal and fitting breaker(s) to be

tested are in service.

2. Connect the test equipment to the terminal.

3. Set the test equipment so that the impedance present to the relay is half the set value.

4. Energise the protection terminal and evaluate the result i.e.

• Check that correct trip has been accomplished according to configu-ration and philosophy.

• Check that all binary output signals that should be activated have been activated.

• Check that all other protection functions that should be activated by this type of fault have been activated.

• Check that no other protection functions that should not be activated have not been activated.

• Check whenever applicable that the disturbance report, event list and disturbance recorder have been activated and performed correct in-formation.

Page 271: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

258

Testing the interaction of the distance protection

Chapter 14Verifying the internal configuration

Page 272: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

259

About this chapter Chapter 15Testing the protection system

Chapter 15 Testing the protection system

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to verify the conformity of the protection system without the pro-tected object energised.

Page 273: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

260

Overview Chapter 15Testing the protection system

1 OverviewBefore start of this process, all individual devices that are involved in the fault clearance process of the protected object must have been tested as individuals and set in operation. The breaker must be ready for an open-close-open cycle.

Scheme performance test is the final test that should be carried out before the protected object is taken into service.

Due to the complexity in combination with already performed tests, it is not necessary to test all protection functions and all fault types in this process. The most important protection functions in the terminal for single line to earth fault and phase-phase fault could be used for the test.

The shaping of the test process is dependent on the complexity of the design of the switchyard. Hereby follows some items which could be used as guidelines.

Page 274: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

261

Testing the interaction of the distance protection

Chapter 15Testing the protection system

2 Testing the interaction of the distance protectionThis procedure describes how to test the interaction of distance protection zone 1 at a transient phase L1-L2 fault in forward direction. The test must be done without the test switch in order to verify the interaction between the terminal and surrounding equipment. Make sure that involved personnel is informed also in remote station.

This procedure describes how to test the interaction of an overcurrent protection stage at a tran-sient phase L1-L2 fault in forward direction. The test must be done without the test switch in order to verify the interaction between the terminal and surrounding equipment. Make sure that involved personnel is informed also in remote station.

Procedure1. Make sure that the protection terminal and related breaker(s) to be

tested are in service.

2. Connect the test equipment to the terminal.

3. Set the test equipment so that the impedance present to the relay is half the set value of zone 1.

4. Prepare a transient fault sequence.

5. Simulate the condition for the synchro-check as for live bus and dead line.

6. Energise the protection terminal and evaluate the result i.e.

• Check that correct trip has been accomplished according to configu-ration and philosophy.

• Check that the autoreclosure have made an reclosing of the protected object.

• Check that activation of all other external devices have been accom-plished according to configuration and protection philosophy.- Check, whenever applicable, that carrier receive signal has ar-

rived at remote end.- Check, whenever applicable, that start of external disturbance

recorder has been accomplished.- Check that event and alarm signals has been given etc.

• Check that no abnormal events have occurred.• Notice the AR dead time and do corrections if needed.

7. Make a new fault case for permanent fault and repeat the steps 1 - 6 above.

Specially note that a permanent trip should occur after the last attempt ac-cording to the programming of the AR.

It is recommended to repeat the procedure 1 - 6 for a protection function which detects earth-faults i.e. residual overcurrent protection.

Page 275: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

262

Testing the interaction of the distance protection

Chapter 15Testing the protection system

Page 276: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

263

About this chapter Chapter 16Checking the directionality

Chapter 16 Checking the directionality

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to check that the directionality is correct for each directional depen-dent functions. The scope is also to verify that all analog values are correct. This must be done with the protection system in operation, the protected object energized and the load current above the min operation current of the terminal.

Page 277: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

264

Overview Chapter 16Checking the directionality

1 OverviewBefore start of this process, all individual devices that are involved in the fault clearance process of the protected object must have been tested as individuals and set in operation. The breaker must be ready for an open-close-open cycle.

As a condition for the test, the following must be fulfilled:

• The magnitude of the load current must be more than 5% of the terminal nominal rate current.

• The load impedance must have an angle -15°<ϕ<115° or 165<ϕ <295°.

The directionality test is performed when the protected object is energized and certain minimum load current with known direction is floating through the protected object.

The design of the test procedure depends on type of protection function to be tested. Here fol-lows some items which could be used as guidelines.

Page 278: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

265

Testing the directionality of the distance protection

Chapter 16Checking the directionality

2 Testing the directionality of the distance protectionThe test, which also is valid as test of the directional phase overcurrent protection, is performed under the menues:

Service Report/Functions/Impedance/General/ImpDirection and .../ImpValues.

Procedure1. Make sure that all control and protection functions that are belong-

ing to the object that are going to be energised are tested and set in operation.

2. Check that the load current will be more than 5% of the terminal nom-inal rate current.

After energizing the line, the local HMI displays if the current direction in each phase is in forward or reverse direction. The measurement is based on ULx/ILx.

Menu for display is located in the menu

ServiceReport/Functions/Impedance/General/ImpDirection

For forward direction the display indicates: angle -15°<ϕ<115°

• L1 = Forward• L2 = Forward• L3 = Forward

For reverse direction of the three measuring loops, the display shows: an-gle 165°<ϕ<295°

• L1 = Reverse• L2 = Reverse• L3 = Reverse

If one of the loops is in the opposite direction than the other two, this in-dicates that the phase sequence of the incoming voltage or current is in-correct.

The actual impedance measured is shown in the menu

ServiceReport/Functions/Impedance/General/ImpValues

XL1 = 0,00 Ohm

RL1 = 63,5 Ohm

Page 279: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

266

Testing the directionality of the distance protection

Chapter 16Checking the directionality

XL2 = 0,00 Ohm

RL2 = 63,5 Ohm

XL3 = 0,00 Ohm

RL3 = 63,5 Ohm

The actual values of the current and voltage phasors can also be used to check the directionality of the distance protection on the HMI under the menu:

Service Report/Phasors/Primary (Secondary)

Page 280: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

267

Testing the directional residual overcurrent protection

Chapter 16Checking the directionality

3 Testing the directional residual overcurrent protectionTo test the direction of the residual overcurrent protection an earth fault must be simulated. The simulation is made as follows:

Procedure1. Disconnect the phase L1 voltage from the VT broken delta.

2. Short-circuit the secondary winding of the CT in phase L3 and dis-connect it from the terminal, see figure 47.

An active load out in the direction of the line will give a current to the earth-fault protection, which lags the polarising voltage by 60°. Since the characteristic angle of the protection is 65 degrees, a symmetrical load current will give operation of the forward direction measuring element when:

(Equation 40)

P and Q are defined positive when the active and reactive power respec-tively is flowing out into the line and U is the primary phase voltage.

Depending on which function to be tested (4-step earth fault protection or residual overcurrent protection, dir and non dir).

The result of the directional test can be observed on the HMI under:

Note!The current transformer in phase L3 must be short-circuited before it is disconnected from the terminal. The disconnected secondary winding of the VT should not be short-circuited. Recon-nect the circuits when the directional test is completed.

Note!Be sure to isolate the trip circuits before testing.

Where:

Iact = P/3U

Ireact = Q/3U

IN>Dir = Set value for forward direction current in percentage of Ib

Page 281: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

268

Testing the directional residual overcurrent protection

Chapter 16Checking the directionality

ServiceReport/Functions/EarthFault/TimeDelayEF/FuncOutputs/STFWServiceReport/Functions/EarthFault/4stepEF/FuncOutputs/STMFW

The reverse direction measuring element operates when:

Iact·cos5°+Ireact·sin5°≥IN>Dir is negative and the numerical value is ≥0.6·IN>Dir.

Figure 47: Directional test of the 4-step residual protection function.

UL1-IL3

Powerdirection

L1L2L3

99000066.vsd

Page 282: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

269

About this chapter Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

Chapter 17 Fault tracing and repair

About this chapterThis chapter describes how to carry out fault tracing and eventually, a change of circuit board.

Page 283: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

270

Fault tracing Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

1 Fault tracing

1.1 Using information on the local HMIIf an internal fault has occurred, the local HMI displays information under:

TerminalReportSelfSuperv

Under these menus the indications of eventual internal failure (serious fault) or internal warning (minor problem) are listed.

Shown as well, are the indications regarding the faulty unit according to table 41.

Table 41: HMI information

Also the internal signals, such as INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING can be connected to binary output contacts for signalling to a control room.

In the Terminal Status - Information, the present information from the self-supervision function can be viewed. Indications of failure or warnings for each hardware module are provided, as well as information about the external time synchronisation and the internal clock. All according to table 42. Loss of time synchronisation can be considered as a warning only. The REx 5xx ter-minal has full functionality without time synchronisation.

HMI information Signal name Activates sum-mary signal

Description

InternFail INT--FAIL Internal fail sum-mary

Intern Warning INT--WARNING Internal warning summary

CPU-modFail INT--CPUFAIL INT--FAIL Main processing module failed

CPU-modWarning INT--CPUWARN INT--WARNING Main processing module warning (failure of clock, time synch., fault locator or distur-bance recorder)

ADC-module INT--ADC INT--FAIL A/D conversion module failed

Slotnn-XXXyy INT--IOyy INT--FAIL I/O module yy failed

Real Time Clock INT--RTC INT--WARNING Internal clock is reset - Set the clock

Time Sync INT--TSYNC INT--WARNING No time synchroni-sation

Page 284: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

271

Fault tracing Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

1.2 Using front-connected PC or SMS• Self-supervision summary = INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING• CPU-module status summary = INT--CPUFAIL and INT--CPUWARN

When an internal fault has occurred, extensive information can be retrieved about the fault from the list of internal events. The list is available in the TERM-STS Terminal Status part of the CAP tool. This time-tagged list has information with the date and time of the last 40 internal events.

The internal events in the list do not only refer to faults in the terminal, but also to other activi-ties, such as change of settings, clearing of disturbance reports and loss of external time synchro-nisation

The following events are logged as Internal events:

Table 42: Internal events

The events in the internal event list are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms.

This means that when using the PC for fault tracing, it provides information on the:

Event message Description Set/reset event

INT--FAILOff Internal fail status Reset event

INT--FAILOn Set event

INT--WARNINGOff Internal warning status Reset event

INT--WARNINGOn Set event

INT--CPUFAILOff Main processing module fatal error status

Reset event

INT--CPUFAILOn Set event

INT--CPUWARNOff Main processing module non-fatal error status

Reset event

INT--CPUWARNOn Set event

INT--ADCOff A/D conversion module status Reset event

INT--ADCOn Set event

INT--IOnOff In/Out module No. n status Reset event

INT--IOn On Set event

INT--RTC Off Real Time Clock (RTC) status Reset event

INT--RTC On Set event

INT--TSYNC Off External time synchronisation sta-tus

Reset event

INT--TSYNC On Set event

DREP-MEMUSED On >80% of the disturbance record-ing memory used

Set event

SETTING CHANGED Any settings in terminal changed

DISTREP CLEARED All disturbances in Disturbance report cleared

Page 285: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

272

Fault tracing Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

• Module that should be changed.• Sequence of faults, if more than one unit is faulty.• Exact time when the fault occurred.

Page 286: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

273

Repair instruction Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

2 Repair instruction

An alternative is to open the terminal and send only the faulty circuit board to ABB for repair. When a printed circuit board is sent to ABB, it must always be placed in a metallic, ESD-proof, protection bag. The user can also purchase separate modules for replacement.

Most electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge and latent damage may oc-cur. Please observe usual procedures for handling electronics and also use an ESD wrist strap. A semi-conducting layer must be placed on the workbench and connected to earth.

Disassemble and reassemble the REx 5xx terminal accordingly:

1. Switch off the dc supply.2. Short-circuit the current transformers and disconnect all current and voltage con-

nections from the terminal.3. Disconnect all signal wires by removing the female connectors.4. Disconnect the optical fibres.5. Unscrew the main back plate of the terminal.6. If the transformer module is to be changed — unscrew the small back plate of the

terminal.7. Pull out the faulty module.8. Check that the new module has correct identity number.

Warning!Never disconnect a secondary connection of current transformer circuit without short-circuiting the transformer’s secondary winding. Operating a current transformer with the secondary winding open will cause a massive potential build-up that may damage the transformer and may cause injuries to humans.

Warning!Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a terminal during normal ser-vice. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be lethal. Operation may be disrupt-ed and terminal and measuring circuitry may be damaged.

Note!Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations.

Caution!Always use a conductive wrist strap connected to protective earth when replacing modules. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage the module and terminal circuitry.

Page 287: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

274

Repair instruction Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

9. Check that the springs on the card rail have connection to the corresponding me-tallic area on the circuit board when the new module is inserted.

10. Reassemble the terminal.

If the REx 5xx terminal has the optional increased measuring accuracy, a file with unique cali-bration data for the transformer module is stored in the Main processing module. Therefore it is not possible to change only one of these modules with maintained accuracy.

Page 288: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

275

Repair support Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

3 Repair supportIf a REx 5xx terminal needs to be repaired, the whole terminal must be removed and sent to ABB Logistic Center. Before returning the material, an inquiry must be sent to ABB Logistic Center.

e-mail: [email protected]

Page 289: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

276

Repair support Chapter 17Fault tracing and repair

Page 290: Protect protection terminal REL 561*2 · Installation and commissioning manual ProtectIT Line differential and distance protection terminal REL 561*2.5

ABB Power Technologies ABSubstation Automation ProductsSE-721 59 VästeråsSwedenTelephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18Internet: www.abb.com/substationautomation

1MR

K 5

06 1

83-U

EN

Printed on recycled and ecolabelled paper at Elanders Novum